Panasonic DMC GF1K User Manual To The F609b5bd C06a 4c5b B97f Fbd88ed77f4f
User Manual: Panasonic DMC-GF1K to the manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 196
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 1 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Operating Instructions Digital Camera/Lens Kit Model No. DMC-GF1C DMC-GF1K Before use, please read these instructions completely. VQT2G62 GN until 2009/8/30 VQT2G62~Safety_eng.fm 2 ページ 2009年8月25日 火曜日 午後1時40分 Dear Customer, We would like to take this opportunity to thank you for purchasing this Panasonic Digital Camera. Please read these Operating Instructions carefully and keep them handy for future reference. Please note that the actual controls and components, menu items, etc. of your Digital Camera may look somewhat different from those shown in the illustrations in these Operating Instructions. Carefully observe copyright laws. • Recording of pre-recorded tapes or discs or other published or broadcast material for purposes other than your own private use may infringe copyright laws. Even for the purpose of private use, recording of certain material may be restricted. Before Use Information for Your Safety WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR PRODUCT DAMAGE, • DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE, DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE PLACED ON THE APPARATUS. • USE ONLY THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES. • DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK); THERE ARE NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. IF THE POWER CORD OF THIS EQUIPMENT IS DAMAGED, IT MUST BE REPLACED WITH AN ELECTRICALLY APPROVED POWER CORD. THE SOCKET OUTLET SHALL BE INSTALLED NEAR THE EQUIPMENT AND SHALL BE EASILY ACCESSIBLE. Product Identification Marking is located on the bottom of units. ∫ About the battery pack CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. • Do not heat or expose to flame. • Do not leave the battery(ies) in an automobile exposed to direct sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed. Warning Risk of fire, explosion and burns. Do not disassemble, heat above 60 xC or incinerate. 2 VQT2G62 VQT2G62~Safety_eng.fm 3 ページ 2009年8月25日 火曜日 午後1時40分 ∫ About the battery charger CAUTION! • DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE, BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE. ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE VENTILATION VENTS. • DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT’S VENTILATION OPENINGS WITH NEWSPAPERS, TABLECLOTHS, CURTAINS, AND SIMILAR ITEMS. • DO NOT PLACE SOURCES OF NAKED FLAMES, SUCH AS LIGHTED CANDLES, ON THE UNIT. • DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY MANNER. • The battery charger is in the standby condition when the AC power supply cord is connected. The primary circuit is always “live” as long as the power cord is connected to an electrical outlet. ∫ Care of the camera • Do not strongly shake or bump the camera by dropping or hitting it. Do not subject to strong pressure. The camera may malfunction, recording pictures may become impossible, or the lens, the LCD monitor or the external case may be damaged. • Be particularly careful in the following places as they may cause this unit to malfunction. – Places with a lot of sand or dust. – Places where water can come into contact with this unit such as when using it on a rainy day or on a beach. • Do not touch the lens or the sockets with dirty hands. Also, be careful not to allow liquids, sand and other foreign matter to get into the space around the lens, buttons etc. • This camera is not waterproof. If water or seawater splashes on the camera, use a dry cloth to wipe the camera body carefully. If the unit does not operate normally, please contact the dealer where you purchased the camera or the repair service centre. • Do not place your hands inside the mount of the digital camera body. Since the sensor unit is a precision apparatus, it may cause a malfunction or damage. ∫ About Condensation (When the lens or the Viewfinder is fogged up) • Condensation occurs when the ambient temperature or humidity changes. Be careful of condensation since it causes lens stains, fungus and camera malfunction. • If condensation occurs, turn the camera off and leave it for about 2 hours. The fog will disappear naturally when the temperature of the camera becomes close to the ambient temperature. ∫ Read together with the “Cautions for Use”. (P171) VQT2G62 3 VQT2G62~Safety_eng.fm 4 ページ 2009年8月25日 火曜日 午後1時40分 -If you see this symbolInformation on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. 4 VQT2G62 VQT2G62~TOC_eng.fm 5 ページ 2009年8月24日 Contents Information for Your Safety ....................... 2 Before Use Standard Accessories ...............................8 Names of the Components ..................... 10 Removing the Hot Shoe Cover ............... 13 Operating the Rear Dial .......................... 13 About the Lens........................................ 14 Preparation Attaching/Detaching the Lens ................. 16 Attaching the Lens Hood.........................18 Attaching the Shoulder Strap ..................19 Charging the Battery ...............................20 • Approximate operating time and number of recordable pictures ..........21 Inserting and Removing the Card (optional)/the Battery...............................24 About the Card........................................ 25 Setting Date/Time (Clock Set) ................26 • Changing the clock setting................26 Setting the Menu.....................................27 • Setting menu items ...........................28 Setting the Quick Menu...........................30 About the Setup Menu ............................ 31 Holding and using your camera ..............37 Basic Selecting the [REC] mode, and record still pictures or motion pictures................38 • Setting [AFS] or [AFC] ...................... 39 • Taking a still picture .......................... 40 • Recording a motion picture ............... 40 • Playback the recorded still pictures or motion picture...............................40 Taking pictures using the automatic function (Intelligent Auto Mode)............................ 41 • Scene detection ................................ 42 • AF Tracking Function........................ 43 • Settings in Intelligent auto mode....... 43 Taking pictures with your favourite settings (Programme AE mode)..............45 月曜日 午前11時59分 • Fix the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway (AFS) ........................46 • Continuously focusing on a subject (AFC) ................................................46 • Take a picture with Manual Focus (MF) ..................................................46 • Focusing ...........................................47 • When the subject is not in focus .......47 • Preventing jitter (camera shake) .......47 • Programme Shift ...............................48 Taking Pictures with the Zoom................49 • Using the Optical Zoom/Using the Extra Optical zoom (EZ)/ Using the Digital Zoom .....................49 Playing back Pictures..............................50 • Changing the Information Displayed on the playback screen.....................51 • Displaying Multiple Screens (Multi Playback) ................................51 • Displaying Pictures by Recording Date (Calendar Playback).................52 • Using the Playback Zoom .................53 Deleting Pictures.....................................54 • To delete a single picture..................54 • To delete multiple pictures (up to 50) or all the pictures ..............54 Advanced (Recording pictures) Switching the display of the LCD Monitor/ Optional External Viewfinder...................56 • Switching the displayed information ....56 Taking Pictures using the Built-in Flash .....60 • Switching to the appropriate flash setting ...............................................60 • Adjust the flash output ......................63 • Setting to the 2nd Curtain Synchro ...64 Compensating the Exposure...................65 Taking Pictures using Burst Mode ..........66 Taking Pictures using Auto Bracket ........68 Taking Pictures with the Self-timer .........70 Setting the method used to focus (AF mode) ...............................................71 • Setting up [ ] (AF Tracking)...........72 • Setting the AF area ...........................73 Taking Pictures with Manual Focus ........74 Fixing the Focus and the Exposure (AF/AE Lock)...........................................75 Adjusting the White Balance ...................77 • Setting the white balance manually .....78 VQT2G62 5 VQT2G62~TOC_eng.fm 6 ページ 2009年8月24日 • Setting the colour temperature ......... 78 • Finely adjusting the white balance.... 79 • White Balance Bracket ..................... 79 Setting the Light Sensitivity .................... 80 Change tone of the colour for the picture to be taken (Film Mode).......................... 82 • Adjusting each Film Mode to the desired setting.................................. 83 • Multi Film Bracket ............................. 83 Taking pictures by specifying the aperture/shutter speed ........................... 84 • Aperture-priority AE .......................... 84 • Shutter-priority AE ............................ 85 Taking picture by setting the exposure manually ................................................. 86 Confirm the effects of aperture and shutter speed (Preview Mode)................ 88 • Confirm the effects of aperture ......... 88 • Confirm the effects of shutter speed ................................... 88 Taking pictures that match the scene being recorded (Scene mode) ................ 89 • * [PORTRAIT].............................. 89 • + [SOFT SKIN]............................. 90 • , [SCENERY] .............................. 90 • [ARCHITECTURE].................... 90 • - [SPORTS] ................................. 90 • [PERIPHERAL DEFOCUS] ...... 90 • [FLOWER] ................................ 91 • 1 [FOOD] ..................................... 91 • [OBJECTS] ............................... 91 • . [NIGHT PORTRAIT] ................. 91 • / [NIGHT SCENERY] .................. 92 • [ILLUMINATIONS] .................... 92 • : [BABY1]/; [BABY2]................ 92 • í [PET]......................................... 93 • 2 [PARTY].................................... 93 • ï [SUNSET] ................................. 94 Taking pictures while adjusting colour (My Colour Mode)................................... 94 • Adjusting the custom settings to achieve desired effects .................... 95 Registering Personal Menu Settings (Registering custom settings) ................. 96 Taking pictures in Custom mode ............ 97 Recording Motion Picture ....................... 98 • Changing [REC MODE] and [REC QUALITY] ............................ 100 • [CONTINUOUS AF]....................... 103 • [WIND CUT]................................... 103 6 VQT2G62 月曜日 午後1時12分 Recording motion pictures with the desired settings (Motion Picture P mode)....................... 104 Taking a picture with Face Recognition function ................................................. 106 • Face Settings.................................. 107 • Auto Registration ............................ 110 • Sensitivity ....................................... 111 Useful Functions at Travel Destinations............................... 112 • Recording which Day of the Vacation You Take the Picture....... 112 • Recording Dates/Times at Overseas Travel Destinations (World Time)... 114 Using the [REC] Mode Menu................ 115 • [FILM MODE].......................... 115 • ? [ASPECT RATIO] ................... 116 • @ [PICTURE SIZE] ..................... 117 • A [QUALITY] .............................. 118 • [FACE RECOG.] ..................... 118 • [STABILIZER] ......................... 118 • [FLASH] .................................. 119 • [RED-EYE REMOVAL] ........... 119 • [FLASH SYNCHRO] ............... 120 • [FLASH ADJUST.] .................. 120 • C [METERING MODE] ............... 120 • [I.EXPOSURE] (Intelligent exposure adjustment) ............. 121 • [LONG SHTR NR]................... 121 • [ISO LIMIT SET] ..................... 121 • [ISO INCREMENTS] ............... 122 • [EX. OPT. ZOOM] ................... 122 • ) [DIGITAL ZOOM] .................... 122 • [BURST RATE] ....................... 122 • [AUTO BRACKET] .................. 123 • [SELF-TIMER] ........................ 123 • [COLOR SPACE] .................... 123 • B [AUDIO REC.] ......................... 124 Using the [MOTION PICTURE] Mode Menu........................................... 125 • [REC MODE] .......................... 125 • [REC QUALITY] ...................... 125 • [CONTINUOUS AF] ................ 125 • [WIND CUT]............................ 126 Using the [CUSTOM MENU] ................ 126 VQT2G62~TOC_eng.fm 7 ページ 2009年8月24日 月曜日 午後12時1分 Advanced (Playback) Others Playing Back Motion Pictures/ Pictures with Audio ...............................132 • Motion pictures................................ 132 • Pictures with audio.......................... 133 Using the [PLAYBACK] mode menu..... 134 • [SLIDE SHOW]........................ 134 • [PLAYBACK MODE] ............... 136 • Ü [FAVORITE] ............................ 137 • [TITLE EDIT] ...........................138 • [TEXT STAMP]........................ 139 • Q [RESIZE] Reducing the picture size (number of pixels) ............141 • [TRIMMING] ............................ 142 • ? [ASPECT CONV.] ................... 143 • N [ROTATE]/ M [ROTATE DISP.] ..................... 144 • [PRINT SET] ...........................145 • P [PROTECT] .............................146 • B [AUDIO DUB.] .........................147 • [FACE REC EDIT] ................... 148 Using the Optional External Viewfinder ...............................162 Using an external flash (optional) .........164 Using the Protector/Filter (optional) ......165 Using the Remote Shutter (optional).....166 Using the AC Adaptor ...........................167 Screen Display/ optional external viewfinder ................................168 Cautions for Use ...................................171 Message Display...................................175 Troubleshooting ....................................178 Number of Recordable Pictures and Available Recording Time .....................187 Specifications ........................................192 Connecting to other equipment Playing Back Pictures on a TV Screen .......................................... 149 • Playing back pictures using the AV cable (supplied) ........................ 149 • Playing back pictures on a TV with an SD Memory Card slot ................150 • Playing back on the TV with HDMI socket ...................................150 Saving the recorded still pictures and motion pictures...................................... 154 • Copy the playback image using an AV cable .................................... 154 • Copying to a PC.............................. 155 Connecting to a PC...............................155 Printing the Pictures.............................. 158 • Selecting a single picture and printing it ......................................... 159 • Selecting multiple pictures and printing them ...................................159 • Print Settings...................................160 VQT2G62 7 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 8 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Before Use Before Use Standard Accessories Check that all the accessories are included before using the camera. Product numbers correct as of September 2009. These may be subject to change. 1 Digital Camera Body (This is referred to as camera body in these operating instructions.) 2 Interchangeable Lens¢1 “LUMIX G 20 mm/F1.7ASPH.” (This is referred to as lens in these operating instructions.) 3 Lens Cap¢1 (This is attached to the interchangeable lens at the time of purchase.) 4 Lens Rear Cap¢1 (This is attached to the interchangeable lens at the time of purchase.) 5 Lens Storage Bag¢1 6 Interchangeable Lens¢2 “LUMIX G VARIO 14– 45 mm/F3.5– 5.6 ASPH./MEGA O.I.S.” 7 Lens Hood¢2 8 Lens Cap¢2 (This is attached to the interchangeable lens at the time of purchase.) 9 Lens Rear Cap¢2 (This is attached to the interchangeable lens at the time of purchase.) 10 Lens Storage Bag¢2 11 Battery Pack (Indicated as battery pack or battery in the text) Charge the battery before use. 12 Battery Charger/AC Adaptor (Indicated as battery charger or charger in the text) 13 AC Cable 14 AV Cable 15 USB Connection Cable 16 CD-ROM • Software: Use it to install the software to your PC. 17 Shoulder Strap 18 Body Cap (This is attached to the camera body at the time of purchase.) 19 Hot shoe cover (This is attached to the camera body at the time of purchase.) ¢1 DMC-GF1C only ¢2 DMC-GF1K only • SD Memory Card and SDHC Memory Card are indicated as card in the text. • The card is optional. • Description in these operating instructions is based on the 20 mm/F1.7 lens included in the DMC-GF1C. About unavailable functions such as STABILIZER (P17), Direction Detection function (P37), description in these operating instructions is based on the 14 mm-45 mm/F3.5-5.6 lens included in the DMC-GF1K. • Consult the dealer or your nearest Service Centre if you lose the supplied accessories. (You can purchase the accessories separately.) 8 VQT2G62 VQT2G62~Body1_mst.fm 9 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時46分 Before Use 1 DMC-GF1C 3 2 H-H020 4 VYF3260 5 VFC4315 VFC4460 DMC-GF1K 6 7 H-FS014045 11 VYC0981 12 DMW-BLB13E 16 8 DE-A49C 17 VFC4459 9 10 VYF3201 VFC4315 VFC4456 13 14 K2CJ29A00002 K1HA08CD0020 K1HA08AD0003 18 19 VKF4385 15 VYF3287 VQT2G62 9 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 10 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Before Use Names of the Components ∫ Camera body 1 Self-timer indicator (P70) AF assist lamp (P129) 2 Sensor 3 Flash (P60) 4 Lens fitting mark (P16) 5 Mount 6 Lens lock pin 7 Lens release button (P17) 1 2 4 5 3 6 7 Rear dial is described as follows in these operating instructions. e.g.: Rotating left or right e.g.: Pressing the rear dial • Refer to P13 for operation of the rear dial. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Flash open button (P60) 8 9 10 11 Playback button (P50, 54, 132, 149, 150, 151) [AF/AE LOCK] button (P75) Rear dial (P48, 51, 53, 65, 73, 79, 84, 86, 104) LCD monitor (P51, 56, 168) [AF/MF] button (P39) [Q.MENU] button (P30) [DISPLAY] button (P51, 56, 88) [MENU/SET] button (P26) Delete button (P54)/ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Preview button (P88)/ Flicker reduction function (P104) 18 Cursor buttons 3/ISO (P80) 2/AF mode (P71) 4/Function button (P31) Assign Menu to 4 button. It is convenient to register a Menu that is used often. [FILM MODE]/[ASPECT RATIO]/[QUALITY]/[METERING MODE]/[I.EXPOSURE]/ [GUIDE LINE]/[ REC AREA]/[REMAINING DISP.] 1/WB (White balance) (P77) 10 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 11 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Before Use In these operating instructions, the cursor buttons are described as shown in the figure below or described with 3/4/2/1. e.g.: When you press the 4 (down) button MENU /SET 19 Focus distance reference mark (P75) 20 Speaker (P133) 21 Drive mode lever Single (P45): Burst (P66): Auto Bracket (P68): Self-timer (P70): 22 Shutter button (P40) 23 Hot shoe cover (P13, 162, 164) 24 Microphone (P99, 124, 147) 25 Mode dial (P38) 26 Camera ON/OFF switch (P26) 27 Status indicator (P38) 28 Motion picture button (P40) or Press 4 21 19 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Shoulder strap eyelet (P19) • Be sure to attach the shoulder strap when using the camera to ensure that you will not drop it. 30 [REMOTE] socket (P166) 31 [HDMI] socket (P150, 151) 32 [AV OUT/DIGITAL] socket (P149, 154, 156, 158) 29 30 31 32 33 DC cable cover (P167) 33 VQT2G62 11 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 12 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Before Use 34 Card/Battery door (P24) 35 Release lever (P24) 36 Tripod receptacle (P175) • When you use a tripod, make sure the tripod is stable when the camera is attached to it. 34 35 36 ∫ Lens H-H020 (LUMIX G 20 mm/F1.7 ASPH.) 37 Lens surface 38 Focus ring (P74) 39 Contact point 40 Lens fitting mark (P16) • The 20 mm/F1.7 interchangeable lens included in the DMC-GF1C utilises a lens drive system to 37 38 39 40 realise a compact and bright F1.7 lens. As a result, sound and vibration may occur during focus operation, but this is not a malfunction. • Operating sounds will be recorded when auto focus is performed during motion picture recording. It is recommended to record with [CONTINUOUS AF] (P103) set to [OFF], if the sound of operation bothers you. (P98) Also, it is not possible to set the Focus mode to [AFC]. (P46) H-FS014045 (LUMIX G VARIO 14 –45 mm/F3.5– 5.6 ASPH./MEGA O.I.S.) 41 Tele 42 Lens surface 43 Focus ring (P74) 44 Wide 45 Zoom ring (P49) 46 [O.I.S.] switch (P17) 47 Contact point 41 42 43 4445 46 48 Lens fitting mark (P16) 47 48 ∫ Battery charger/AC adaptor (P20, 167) 49 50 51 52 Power input socket [AC IN] [CHARGE] indicator Power output socket [DC OUT] Battery holder 49 50 51 12 VQT2G62 52 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 13 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Before Use Removing the Hot Shoe Cover The camera comes with a hot shoe cover attached to the hot shoe. To use the Optional External Viewfinder (P162) or External Flash (P164), please remove the hot shoe cover. Press the hot shoe cover release button and pull the shoe cover in the direction of the arrow. Note • When not using the Optional External Viewfinder (P162) or External Flash (P164), be sure to attach the hot shoe cover. • Please be careful not to lose the hot shoe cover. • When not using the hot shoe cover, be careful not to let liquid, sand, or any other foreign matter enter the connection terminals. • Keep the Hot Shoe Cover out of reach of children to prevent swallowing. Operating the Rear Dial There are 2 ways to operate the rear dial, rotating left or right, and deciding by pressing. Example of operation 1 “Rotating” 2 “Pressing”¢3 Adjustments of Programme Shift ¢1 (P48), Aperture (P84), Shutter Speed (P85), etc. Compensating the exposure (P65) etc. Multi (calendar) Playback (P51), Playback Zoom ¢2 (P53) Normal playback (while Multi Playback), Move images while zoomed (while using Playback Zoom) A Rear dial ¢1 Recording ¢2 Playback ¢3 It functions in the same way as [MENU/SET] button in various settings including set and finish. Note • The sound of the rear dial operation may be recorded when operated during motion picture recording. VQT2G62 13 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 14 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Before Use About the Lens This unit can use the dedicated lenses compatible with the Micro Four Thirds™ System lens mount specification (Micro Four Thirds mount). Select a lens that matches the scene being recorded and your use of the pictures. ∫ “Micro Four Thirds Mount” This is the lens mount standard for the “Micro Four Thirds System”. This was newly developed as interchangeable lens mount dedicated for digital cameras. ∫ About the functions of your lens • Depending on the type of lens, you may not be able to use some functions such as the direction detection function (P37), [STABILIZER] (P118), Quick AF (P128) and Continuous AF (P128). • The available flash range etc. differs depending on the aperture value of the lens you are using. • Take some test pictures with the lens you are using. • Lens with the Four Thirds™ mount specification can be used by using the mount adaptor (DMW-MA1; optional). Because of its structure, Micro Four Thirds mount specification lenses cannot be used on the Four Thirds mount specification cameras. It can only be used on the Micro Four Thirds mount specification cameras. • When you use the M mount adaptor or R mount adaptor (DMW-MA2M, DMW-MA3R; optional), you can use Leica M Mount or Leica R Mount interchangeable lenses. – The focal distance of the employed lens is effectively doubled. (A 50 mm lens is equivalent to a 100 mm lens) – For certain lenses, the actual distance at which the subject is in focus may differ slightly from the rated distance. 14 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 15 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Before Use Interchangeable lenses that can be used with this unit and Auto focus / Auto Aperture Operation (As of September 2009) (±: Usable, ¥: Some functions/features limited, —: Not usable) when recording still pictures Lens type while recording motion pictures Auto focus Auto aperture setting Auto focus Auto aperture setting ¥ ([AFS]) ± ¥¢4, 5 ¥¢7 ± ([AFS], [AFC]) ± ¥¢4, 5 ¥¢7 Micro Four Thirds mount specification lens compatible to HD motion pictures (LUMIX G VARIO HD) ± ([AFS], [AFC]) ± ±¢4 ± Four Thirds mount specification lens compatible to contrast AF ¥ ([AFS]) ± ¥¢6 ¥¢7 — ± — ¥¢7 — — — — Lens included in the DMC-GF1C. (H-H020) Lens included in the DMC-GF1K. (H-FS014045) Micro Four Thirds Other Micro Four mount specification Thirds mount lens specification lens¢3 Four Thirds mount specification lens¢1 Four Thirds mount specification lens not compatible to contrast AF Leica mount Interchangeable specification lens¢2 lens for Leica ¢1 Mount adaptor (DMW-MA1; optional) is necessary to use with this unit. ¢2 A Leica lens mount adaptor (DMW-MA2M or DMW-MA3R; optional) is necessary. ¢3 This function is not supported by some Micro Four Thirds mount specification lenses For lens operations, please see our website. ¢4 When recording motion pictures, the focus is continuously adjusted for both [AFS] and [AFC] (P46). ¢5 AF tracking is slower than the HD motion picture compatible lens (LUMIX G VARIO HD lens), also the sound of auto focus operation may be recorded. (The auto focus is activated by pressing the shutter button halfway.) ¢6 Auto focus is activated only when the shutter button is pressed halfway. The sound of Auto Focus Operation may be recorded at this time. ¢7 The sound of aperture operation may be recorded. Refer to catalogues/Web pages for most current information regarding compatible lenses. http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/ (This Site is English only.) VQT2G62 15 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 16 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation Preparation Attaching/Detaching the Lens • Check that the camera is turned off. • Close the flash. Attaching a lens to the camera body Turn the lens rear cap A and the body cap B in the direction of the arrow to detach them. • Do not put your hands inside the mount. Align the lens fitting marks C (red marks) on the camera body and the lens and then rotate the lens in the direction of the arrow until it clicks. • Do not press the lens release button when you attach a lens. • Do not try to attach the lens when holding it at an angle to the camera body as the lens mount may get scratched. • Check that the lens is attached correctly. Detach the lens cap. • Detach the lens cap before taking pictures. 16 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 17 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation ∫ Optical Image Stabilizer The Optical Image Stabilizer function is set for activation when the lens is attached to the camera body. A lens which supports the stabilizer function is required. – The 20 mm/F1.7 interchangeable lens supplied with the DMC-GF1C does not support the stabilizer function. – The 14-45 mm/F3.5-5.6 interchangeable lens supplied with the DMC-GF1K supports the stabilizer function. Set the [O.I.S.] switch to [ON]. • You can change the Optical Image Stabilizer mode to [MODE1], [MODE2] or [MODE3] using [STABILIZER] in the [REC] mode menu. (P118) It is set to [MODE1] at the time of purchase. • We recommend setting the [O.I.S.] switch to [OFF] when using a tripod. If the [O.I.S.] switch is set to [OFF], [ ] is displayed on the LCD monitor/optional external viewfinder. Detaching a lens from the camera body Attach the lens cap. Press the lens release button D while turning the lens as far as possible in the direction of the arrow to detach it. • Always attach the body cap to the camera body so that dirt or dust does not get inside. • Attach the lens rear cap so that the lens contact point does not get scratched. Note • Change lenses where there is not a lot of dirt or dust. Refer to P172 when dirt or dust gets on the lens. • When you turn the camera off or carry the camera, attach the lens cap to protect the surface of the lens. • Be careful not to lose the lens cap, the lens rear cap and the body cap. VQT2G62 17 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 18 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation Attaching the Lens Hood In bright sunlight or backlight, the lens hood will minimise lens flare and ghosting. The lens hood cuts off excess lighting and improves the picture quality. • The 20 mm/F1.7 interchangeable lens supplied with the DMC-GF1C does not have a lens hood. • Check that the camera is turned off. • Close the flash. To attach the lens hood (flower shape) that came with the 14–45 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in the DMC-GF1K Insert the lens hood into the lens with the short sides at the top and bottom, and turn in the direction of the arrow until it stops. A Fitting to the mark. ∫ Temporarily storing the lens hood 1 Turn the lens hood in the direction of the arrow to detach it. 2 Reverse the lens hood and then attach it in the same way as shown previously. • Attach the lens cap. • When temporarily storing the lens hood, check that it is firmly attached and that it does not appear in the picture. Note • Hold the short sides of the flower shaped lens hood when attaching or detaching it. • When taking pictures with flash with the lens hood attached, the lower portion of the photo may turn dark (vignetting effect) and the control of the flash may be disabled because the photo flash may be obscured by the lens hood. We recommend detaching the lens hood. • When using the AF assist lamp in the dark, detach the lens hood. 18 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 19 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation Attaching the Shoulder Strap • We recommend attaching the shoulder strap when using the camera to prevent it from dropping. Pass the shoulder strap through the shoulder strap eyelet on the camera body. A: Shoulder strap eyelet Pass the end of the shoulder strap through the ring in the direction of the arrow and then pass it through the stopper. Pass the end of the shoulder strap through the hole on the other side of the stopper. Pull the other side of the shoulder strap and then check that it will not come out. • Perform steps 1 to 4 and then attach the other side of the shoulder strap. Note • Be sure to follow the steps and attach the shoulder strap correctly. • Check that the shoulder strap is firmly attached to the camera. • Attach the shoulder strap so that the “LUMIX” LOGO is on the outside. • Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder. – Do not wrap the strap around your neck. – It may result in injury or accident. • Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can reach it. – It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping around the neck. VQT2G62 19 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 20 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation Charging the Battery ∫ About batteries that you can use with this unit The battery that can be used with this unit is DMW-BLB13E. It has been found that counterfeit battery packs which look very similar to the genuine product are made available to purchase in some markets. Some of these battery packs are not adequately protected with internal protection to meet the requirements of appropriate safety standards. There is a possibility that these battery packs may lead to fire or explosion. Please be advised that we are not liable for any accident or failure occurring as a result of use of a counterfeit battery pack. To ensure that safe products are used we would recommend that a genuine Panasonic battery pack is used. • Use the dedicated charger and battery. • The camera has a function for distinguishing batteries which can be used safely. The dedicated battery (DMW-BLB13E) supports this function. The only batteries suitable for use with this unit are genuine Panasonic products and batteries manufactured by other companies and certified by Panasonic. (Batteries which do not support this function cannot be used). Panasonic cannot in any way guarantee the quality, performance or safety of batteries which have been manufactured by other companies and are not genuine Panasonic products. • The battery is not charged when the camera is shipped. Charge the battery before use. • Charge the battery with the charger indoors. • Charge the battery in a temperature between 10 oC to 35 oC. (The battery temperature should also be the same.) Connect the AC cable. • The battery cannot be charged when the DC cable (DMW-DCC3; optional) is connected to the AC adaptor. Attach the battery with attention to the direction of the battery. • Charging starts when the [CHARGE] indicator A lights green. Detach the battery after charging is completed. • Charging is complete when the [CHARGE] indicator A turns off. 20 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 21 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation ∫ Charging Charging time Approx. 155 min • The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely. The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used. The charging time for the battery in hot/ cold environments or a battery that has not been used for long time may be longer than normal. When the charging has been completed successfully, the [CHARGE] indicator turns off. Charging time and number of recordable pictures with the optional battery pack (DMW-BLB13E) are the same as above. ∫ When the [CHARGE] indicator flashes • The battery temperature is too high or too low. Please charge the battery again in a temperature between 10 oC to 35 oC. • The terminals of the charger or the battery are dirty. In this case, wipe them with a dry cloth. ∫ Battery indication The battery indication is displayed on the LCD monitor/the optional external viewfinder. [It does not appear when you use the camera with the AC adaptor (P167) connected.] • The indication turns red and blinks if the remaining battery power is exhausted. (The status indicator also blinks) Recharge the battery or replace it with a fully charged battery. Note • Do not use any other AC cables except the supplied one. • Disconnect the charger from the power outlet after the charging is completed.The battery becomes warm after using it and during and after charging. The camera also becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction. • The battery will become discharged if left for a long period of time after being charged. • The battery can be recharged even when it still has some charge left, but it is not recommended that the battery charge be frequently topped up while the battery is fully charged. (Since characteristic swelling may occur.) • Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the power plug. Otherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or the resulting heat generated. Approximate operating time and number of recordable pictures ∫ Recording still pictures (when using the LCD monitor)(By CIPA standard in Programme AE mode) When 20 mm/F1.7 lens When 14 – 45 mm/F3.5 – 5.6 lens included in DMC-GF1C is used included in DMC-GF1K is used Number of recordable pictures Approx. 380 pictures Approx. 350 pictures Recording time Approx. 190 min Approx. 175 min Recording conditions by CIPA standard • CIPA is an abbreviation of [Camera & Imaging Products Association]. • Temperature: 23 oC/Humidity: 50% when LCD monitor is on. • Using a Panasonic SD Memory Card (512 MB). • Using the supplied battery. • Starting recording 30 seconds after the camera is turned on. • Recording once every 30 seconds with full flash every second recording. VQT2G62 21 VQT2G62~Body1_mst.fm 22 ページ 2009年8月24日 月曜日 午後12時5分 Preparation • Turning the camera off every 10 recordings and leaving it until the temperature of the battery decreases. The number of recordable pictures varies depending on the recording interval time. If the recording interval time becomes longer, the number of recordable pictures decreases. • When 20 mm/F1.7 lens included in DMC-GF1C is used: – When recording once every 2 minutes, the number of recordable pictures decreases to about 107. • When 14–45 mm/F3.5–5.6 lens included in DMC-GF1K is used: – When recording once every 2 minutes, the number of recordable pictures decreases to about 100. ∫ Recording still pictures (when using the optional external viewfinder)(By CIPA standard in Programme AE mode) When 20 mm/F1.7 lens When 14 –45 mm/F3.5 – 5.6 lens included in DMC-GF1C is used included in DMC-GF1K is used Number of recordable pictures Approx. 430 pictures Approx. 400 pictures Recording time Approx. 215 min Approx. 200 min ∫ Recording motion pictures (when using the LCD monitor) – [AVCHD Lite](Recording with picture quality set to [SH]([ ])) When 20 mm/F1.7 lens When 14 –45 mm/F3.5 – 5.6 lens included in DMC-GF1C is used included in DMC-GF1K is used Continuous recordable time (motion pictures) Approx. 210 min Approx. 170 min Actual recordable time (motion pictures) Approx. 110 min Approx. 100 min – [MOTION JPEG](Recording with picture quality set to [HD]([ ])) When 20 mm/F1.7 lens When 14 –45 mm/F3.5 – 5.6 lens included in DMC-GF1C is used included in DMC-GF1K is used Continuous recordable time (motion pictures) Approx. 210 min Approx. 170 min Actual recordable time (motion pictures) Approx. 110 min Approx. 100 min • These times are for an ambient temperature of 23 oC and a humidity of 50%. Please be aware that these times are approximate. • Actual recordable time is the time available for recording when repeating actions such as switching the power supply [ON] / [OFF], starting/stopping recording, zoom operation etc. ¢ Motion picture recorded continuously in [MOTION JPEG] is up to 2 GB. Only the maximum recordable time for 2 GB is displayed on the screen. ∫ Playback (when using the LCD monitor) When 20 mm/F1.7 lens When 14 –45 mm/F3.5 – 5.6 lens included in DMC-GF1C is used included in DMC-GF1K is used Playback time 22 VQT2G62 Approx. 360 min Approx. 290 min DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 23 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation Note • The operating times and number of recordable pictures will differ according to the environment and the operating conditions. For example, in the following cases, the operating times shorten and the number of recordable pictures is reduced. – In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes. – When using [AUTO POWER LCD] or [POWER LCD] (P33). – When operations such as flash and zoom are used repeatedly. • When the operating time of the camera becomes extremely short even after properly charging the battery, the life of the battery may have expired. Buy a new battery. VQT2G62 23 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 24 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation Inserting and Removing the Card (optional)/the Battery • Always use genuine Panasonic batteries (DMW-BLB13E). • If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the quality of this product. LOCK Slide the release lever in the direction of the arrow and open the card/battery door. OPEN • Check that this unit is turned off. • Close the flash. • We recommend using a Panasonic card. Battery: Insert until it is locked by the lever A being careful about the direction you insert it. Pull the lever A in the direction of the arrow to remove the battery. Card: Push it fully until it clicks being careful about the direction you insert it. To remove the card, push the card until it clicks, then pull the card out upright. B: Do not touch the connection terminals of the card. • The card may be damaged if it is not fully inserted. LOCK 2:Slide the release lever in the direction of the arrow. OPEN 1:Close the card/battery door. • If the card/battery door cannot be completely closed, remove the card, check its direction and then insert it again. Note • Remove the battery after use. • Do not remove the battery while the power is on as the settings on the camera may not be stored properly. • The supplied battery is designed only for the camera. Do not use it with any other equipment. • Before removing the card or battery, turn the camera off, and wait until the status indicator has gone off completely. (Otherwise, this unit may no longer operate normally and the card itself may be damaged or the recorded pictures may be lost.) 24 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 25 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation About the Card Access to the card The access indication lights red when pictures are being recorded on the card. Card The following types of cards can be used with this unit. (These cards are indicated as card in the text.) Type of card SD Memory Card (8 MB to 2 GB) (Formatted using the FAT12 or FAT16 format in compliance with the SD standard) SDHC Memory Card (4 GB to 32 GB)¢ (Formatted using the FAT32 format in compliance with the SD standard) Characteristics • Fast recording and writing speed • Write-Protect switch A provided (When this switch is set to the [LOCK] position, no further data writing, deletion or formatting is possible. The ability to write, delete and format data is restored when the switch is returned to its original position.) A 2 ¢ The SDHC Memory Card is a memory card standard decided by the SD Association in 2006 for high capacity memory cards more than 2 GB. ¢ You can use an SDHC Memory Card in equipment that is compatible with SDHC Memory Cards however you cannot use an SDHC Memory Card in equipment that is only compatible with SD Memory Cards. (Always read the operating instructions for the equipment being used.) • You can only use cards with SDHC logo (indicating compliance with the SD standard) if using cards with 4 GB or more capacity. • It is recommended to use a card with SD Speed Class¢ with “Class 6” or higher when recording motion pictures. ¢ SD speed class is the speed standard regarding continuous writing. • Please confirm the latest information on the following website. http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/ (This Site is English only.) Note • Do not turn off the power or remove the battery, card, or the DC cable (DMW-DCC3; optional) (when the AC adaptor is in use), while the access indicator is lit, while writing, reading, or deleting the picture, formatting (P36), etc. Also, do not apply vibration, shock, or static electricity to the unit. The card or the data on the card may be damaged, and this unit may no longer operate normally. If operation fails due to vibration, impact or static electricity, perform the operation again. • The data on the card may be damaged or lost due to electromagnetic waves, static electricity or breakdown of the camera or the card. We recommend storing important data on a PC etc. • Do not format the card on your PC or other equipment. Format it on the camera only to ensure proper operation. (P36) • Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing. VQT2G62 25 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 26 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation Setting Date/Time (Clock Set) • The clock is not set when the camera is shipped. Turn the camera on. A [MENU/SET] button OFF ON Press [MENU/SET]. MENU /SET Press 2/1 to select the items (year, month, day, hour, minute, display sequence or time display format), and press 3/4 to set. : : A: Time at the home area B: Time at the travel destination (P114) ‚: Cancel without setting the clock. • Select either [24HRS] or [AM/PM] for the time display format. • AM/PM is displayed when [AM/PM] is selected. • When [AM/PM] is selected as the time display format, midnight is displayed as AM 12:00 and noon is displayed as PM 12:00. This display format is common in the US and elsewhere. Press [MENU/SET] to set. • Turn the camera off after finishing setting the clock. Then turn it on and check that the clock setting is correct. • When [MENU/SET] has been pressed to complete the settings without the clock having been set, set the clock correctly by following the “Changing the clock setting” procedure below. Changing the clock setting Select [CLOCK SET] in the [SETUP] menu, and press 1. (P28) • It can be changed in steps 3 and 4 to set the clock. 26 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 27 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation • Once a charged battery has been installed for 24 hours, the clock setting is maintained for 3 months using the built-in clock battery even without the battery. Note • The clock is displayed when [DISPLAY] is pressed several times during recording. • You can set the year from 2000 to 2099. • If the clock is not set, the correct date cannot be printed when you stamp the date on the pictures with [TEXT STAMP] (P139) or order a photo studio to print the pictures. • If the clock is set, the correct date can be printed even if the date is not displayed on the screen of the camera. Setting the Menu This camera offers menu selections that allow you to customize its operation to maximise your picture taking experience. In particular, the [SETUP] menu contains some important settings relating to the camera’s clock and power. Check the settings of this menu before proceeding to use the camera. ! [REC] mode menu (P115 to 124) • This menu lets you set the aspect ratio, number of pixels and other aspects of the pictures you are recording. [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu (P125 to 126) • This menu lets you set the [REC MODE], [REC QUALITY], and other aspects for motion picture recording. [CUSTOM MENU] (P126 to 131) • Operation of the unit, such as displaying of the screen and button operations, can be set up according to your preferences. Also, it is possible to register the modified settings. [SETUP] menu (P31 to 36) • This menu lets you perform the clock settings, select the operating beep tone settings and set other settings which make it easier for you to operate the camera. [MY MENU] • Up to 5 menu items used recently can be memorised. Items used a lot can be recalled easily. ( [PLAYBACK] mode menu (P134 to 148) • This menu lets you make the protection, trimming or print settings, etc. of recorded pictures. Note • There are functions that cannot be set or used depending on the modes or menu settings being used on the camera due to the specifications. VQT2G62 27 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 28 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation Setting menu items This section describes how to select the [REC] mode menu settings, and the same setting can be used for the [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu, [CUSTOM MENU] menu, [SETUP] menu, [MY MENU] menu and [PLAYBACK] mode menu as well. • If you set [MENU RESUME] (P130) in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu to [ON], the screen shows the last selected menu item when the camera was turned off. Example: Setting [I.EXPOSURE] from [OFF] to [HIGH] in the Programme AE mode Turn the camera on. A [MENU/SET] button B Mode dial Set the mode dial to [ OFF ON ]. Press [MENU/SET] to display the menu. MENU /SET Switching to other menus e.g.: Switching to the [SETUP] menu 1 Press 2. 2 Press 4 or rotate the rear dial to select the [SETUP] menu icon [ ]. or 3 Press 1 or the rear dial. • Select a menu item next and set it. or 28 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 29 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation Press 3/4 or rotate the rear dial to select [I.EXPOSURE]. • Select the item at the very bottom, and press 4 or rotate the rear dial right to move to the next screen. or Press 1 or the rear dial. • Depending on the item, its setting may not appear or it may be displayed in a different way. or Press 3/4 or rotate the rear dial to select [HIGH]. or Press [MENU/SET] or the rear dial to set. MENU /SET or Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu. VQT2G62 29 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 30 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation Setting the Quick Menu By using the Quick Menu, some of the menu settings can be easily found. • The features that can be adjusted using Quick Menu are determined by the mode or a display style the camera is in. Press [Q.MENU] to display the Quick Menu in recording status. Q.MENU Press 3/4/2/1 or rotate the rear dial to select the menu item and the setting. • Menus that can be setup are displayed in orange when selected. • Setup method is different as following depending on the displayed screen during recording. Refer to P56 about the displayed screen. [ ] (LCD monitor style) • Proceed to step 4 below after selecting the item and settings. [ ] (Finder style) • Select the item, press the rear dial, and then select the setting. STD STD AFS P −3 0 +3 AUTO AWB 9 AFS P STD −3 0 +3 AUTO AWB 9 AFS P −3 0 +3 AUTO AWB 9 Press [MENU/SET] or the rear dial to set the menu. MENU /SET or Press [Q.MENU] to close the Quick Menu. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the Quick Menu. 30 VQT2G62 Q.MENU DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 31 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation Perform these settings if you need to. About the Setup Menu [CLOCK SET], [ECONOMY] and [AUTO REVIEW] are important items. Check their settings before using them. • In the Intelligent Auto Mode, only [CLOCK SET], [WORLD TIME], [BEEP] and [LANGUAGE] can be set. For details on how to select the [SETUP] menu settings, refer to P28. U [CLOCK SET] Setting Date/Time. • Refer to P26 for details. Set the time in your home area and travel destination. [WORLD TIME] “ [DESTINATION]: Travel destination area – [HOME]: Your home area • Refer to P114 for details. Set the departure date and the return date of the vacation. — [TRAVEL DATE] [TRAVEL SETUP] [OFF]/[SET] [LOCATION] [OFF]/[SET] • Refer to P112 for details. Assign [REC] mode menu or [CUSTOM MENU] menu to 4 button. It is convenient to register functions that are used often. [Fn BUTTON SET] [FILM MODE]/[ASPECT RATIO]/[QUALITY]/ [METERING MODE]/[I.EXPOSURE]/[GUIDE LINE]/ [ REC AREA]/[REMAINING DISP.] • Refer to P115 for details about [REC] mode menu. • Refer to P126 for details about [CUSTOM MENU]. • The camera will not be able to operate with 3/4/2/1 if the [DIRECT AF AREA] (P128) is set to [ON]. Set using the Quick Menu (P30). You can conserve the battery life by setting these menus. Also, it will turn off the LCD monitor automatically when not in use to prevent discharge of the battery. q [ECONOMY] p [POWER SAVE]: The camera is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting. [OFF]/[1MIN.]/[2MIN.]/[5MIN.]/[10MIN.] [AUTO LCD OFF]: The LCD monitor is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting. [OFF]/[15SEC.]/[30SEC.] VQT2G62 31 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 32 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation • Press the shutter button halfway or turn the camera off and on to cancel [POWER SAVE]. • [POWER SAVE] is set to [5MIN.] in the Intelligent Auto Mode. • [POWER SAVE] is fixed to [2MIN.] when [AUTO LCD OFF] is set to [15SEC.] or [30SEC.]. • Press any button to turn on the LCD monitor again. • [ECONOMY] does not work in the following cases. – When using the AC adaptor – When connecting to a PC or a printer – When recording or playing back motion pictures – During a slide show Set the length of time that the picture is displayed after taking it. [REVIEW]: o [AUTO REVIEW] [OFF]/[1SEC.]/[3SEC.]/[5SEC.]/ [HOLD]: The pictures are displayed until shutter button is pressed halfway. [ZOOM]: The picture enlarged 4k is displayed. [OFF]/[1SEC.]/[3SEC.]/[5SEC.] • If [REVIEW] is set to [HOLD], the playback screen display can be switched (P51) during Auto Review when taking pictures with the drive mode lever set to [ ] (P45) or [ ] (P70). • When [HOLD] has been selected, the zoom time cannot be set. • The Auto Review function is activated regardless of its setting when using Burst Mode (P66) or Auto Bracket (P68) and when recording still pictures with audio (P124). (Will not enlarge/hold) Also, you cannot set the Auto Review function. • If [HIGHLIGHT] (P32) is set to [ON], white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white when the Auto Review function is activated. • [AUTO REVIEW] does not work when recording motion pictures. • When [AUTO REGISTRATION] in [FACE RECOG.] (P106) is set to [ON], [REVIEW] can only be set to [3SEC.] or [5SEC.]. (zoom is switched [OFF]) [HIGHLIGHT] When the Auto Review function is activated or when playing back, white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white. [OFF]/[ON] • If there are any white saturated areas, we [ON] [OFF] recommend compensating the exposure towards negative (P65) referring to the histogram (P59) and then taking the picture again. It may result in a better quality picture. • There may be white saturated areas if the distance between the camera and the subject is too close when taking pictures with the flash. If [HIGHLIGHT] is set to [ON] in this case, the area directly illuminated by the photo flash will become white saturated and appear blinking in black and white. • The LCD/EVF will display overexposed portions of the image as white blinking areas. These only exist on the camera’s display, not on the actual photo. • This does not work while in Multi Playback (P51), Calendar Playback (P52), or Playback Zoom (P53). 32 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 33 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation [MONITOR]/ [VIEWFINDER] Brightness, colour, or red or blue tint of the LCD monitor/optional external viewfinder is adjusted. • Adjust the brightness of the screen with 3/4, contrast and saturation with 2/1 or the rear dial. • When [DISPLAY] is pressed in screen shown right, it will switch to the colour adjustment screen. Adjust between red and green with 3/4, or between orange and blue with 2/1 or the rear dial. Press [MENU/SET] to return to the LCD adjustment screen. • It will adjust the LCD monitor when the LCD monitor is in use, and the viewfinder when optional external viewfinder is in use. These menu settings make it easier to see the LCD monitor when you are in bright places. LCD [LCD MODE] [OFF] „ [AUTO POWER LCD]: The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is around the camera. … [POWER LCD]: The LCD monitor becomes brighter and easier to see even when taking pictures outdoors. • The brightness of the pictures displayed on the LCD monitor is increased so some subjects may appear differently from actuality on the LCD monitor. However, this does not affect the recorded pictures. • The LCD monitor automatically returns to normal brightness after 30 seconds when recording in Power LCD mode. Press any button to make the LCD monitor bright again. • If the screen is difficult to see because of light from the sun etc. shining on it, use your hand or another object to block the light. • The number of recordable pictures decreases in Auto Power LCD and Power LCD modes. • [AUTO POWER LCD] cannot be selected when playing back pictures. • [AUTO POWER LCD] is disabled during motion picture recording. • When the menu screen is displayed in a dark environment etc., the LCD monitor becomes darker even if [LCD MODE] is set to [OFF]. Set the screen that is displayed when the mode dial is set to } [SCENE MENU] . [OFF]: The recording screen in the currently selected scene mode appears. [AUTO]: The scene mode menu screen appears. Set the focus confirmation beep, the self-timer beep and the alarm beep. [BEEP] u [VOLUME] [s] (Muted) [t] (Low) [u] (High) Adjust the volume of the speaker to any of 7 levels. • When you connect the camera to a TV, the volume of the TV speakers does not change. VQT2G62 33 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 34 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation v [NO.RESET] Reset the file number of the next recording to 0001. • The folder number is updated and the file number starts from 0001. (P157) • A folder number between 100 and 999 can be assigned. When the folder number reaches 999, the number cannot be reset. We recommend formatting the card (P36) after saving the data on a PC or elsewhere. • To reset the folder number to 100, format the card first and then use this function to reset the file number. A reset screen for the folder number will then appear. Select [YES] to reset the folder number. w [RESET] The [REC] or [SETUP]/[CUSTOM MENU] menu settings are reset to the initial settings. • When the [REC] mode settings are reset, data registered with [FACE RECOG.] will be also reset, too. • When [SETUP]/[CUSTOM MENU] menu settings are reset, the following settings are also reset. In addition, [FAVORITE] (P137) in [PLAYBACK] mode menu is set to [OFF], and [ROTATE DISP.] (P144) is set to [ON]. – The birthday and name settings for [BABY1]/[BABY2] (P92) and [PET] (P93) in Scene Mode. – The settings of [TRAVEL DATE] (P112) (departure date, return date, location) – The [WORLD TIME] (P114) setting. • The folder number and the clock setting are not changed. Select the USB communication system after or before connecting the camera to your PC or your printer with the USB connection cable (supplied). x [USB MODE] y [SELECT ON CONNECTION]: Select either [PC] or [PictBridge(PTP)] if you connected the camera to a PC or a printer supporting PictBridge. { [PictBridge(PTP)]: Set after or before connecting to a printer supporting PictBridge. z [PC]: Set after or before connecting to a PC. • When [PC] is selected, the camera is connected via the “USB Mass Storage” communication system. • When [PictBridge(PTP)] is selected, the camera is connected via the “PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol)” communication system. Set to match the colour television system in each country. | [VIDEO OUT] [NTSC]: Video output is set to NTSC system. [PAL]: Video output is set to PAL system. • This will operate when the AV cable or HDMI mini cable (optional) is connected. Set to match the type of TV. [TV ASPECT] [W]: When connecting to a 16:9 screen TV. [X]: When connecting to a 4:3 screen TV. • This will work when the AV cable is connected. 34 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 35 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the HDMI compatible high definition TV connected with this unit using the HDMI mini cable (optional). [HDMI MODE] [AUTO]: The output resolution is automatically set based on the information from the connected TV. [1080i]: The interlace method with 1080 available scan lines is used for output. [720p]: The progressive method with 720 available scan lines is used for output. [576p]¢1/[480p]¢2: The progressive method with 576¢1/480¢2 available scan lines is used for output. ¢1 When [VIDEO OUT] is set to [PAL] ¢2 When [VIDEO OUT] is set to [NTSC] • Interlace method/progressive method i= interlace scanning is scanning the screen with half of the effective scanning lines every 1/50 seconds, where p= progressive scanning is a high density image signal that is scanning the screen with all the effective scanning lines every 1/50 seconds. The [HDMI] terminal on this unit is compatible with high definition output [1080i]. It is necessary to have a compatible TV to enjoy progressive and high definition images. • If the images are not output on the TV when the setting is [AUTO], match with the image format your TV can display, and select number of effective scanning lines. (Please read the operating instructions for the TV.) • This will work when the HDMI mini cable (optional) is connected. • Refer to P150 for details. Setup so this unit can be controlled by the remote control of the VIERA by automatically coupling this unit with the VIERA Link compatible equipment using HDMI mini cable (optional). [VIERA Link] [OFF]: Operation is performed with the buttons on this unit. [ON]: Remote control operation of the VIERA Link compatible equipment is enabled. (Not all operations are possible) Button operation of the main unit will be limited. • This will work when the HDMI mini cable (optional) is connected. • Refer to P151 for details. [VERSION DISP.] This enables the firmware versions of the camera and lens to be checked. • [–. –] is displayed as the lens firmware when the lens is not mounted. VQT2G62 35 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 36 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation Set the language displayed on the screen. ~ [LANGUAGE] [ENGLISH]/[DEUTSCH]/[FRANÇAIS]/[ESPAÑOL]/[ITALIANO]/ [¢] • If you set a different language by mistake, select [~] from the menu icons to set the desired language. [FORMAT] The card is formatted. Formatting permanently deletes all data on your memory card. Please be sure all pictures and motion pictures are saved elsewhere before using this feature. • Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (P167) when formatting. Do not turn the camera off during formatting. • If the card has been formatted on a PC or other equipment, format it on the camera again. • If the card cannot be formatted, consult your nearest Service Centre. 36 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 37 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Preparation Holding and using your camera Tips for taking good pictures A AF assist lamp • Do not cover the flash or the AF assist lamp with your fingers or other objects. • Hold the camera gently with both hands, keep your arms still at your side and stand with your feet slightly apart. • Be careful not to move the camera when you press the shutter button. • Do not touch the front of the lens. (P173) • When taking pictures, make sure your footing is stable and there is no danger of colliding with another person, an object etc. Direction Detection Function A lens which supports the Direction Detection Function is required. – The 20 mm/F1.7 interchangeable lens supplied with the DMC-GF1C does not support the Direction Detection Function. – The 14-45 mm/F3.5-5.6 interchangeable lens supplied with the DMC-GF1K supports the Direction Detection Function. Pictures recorded with the camera held vertically are played back vertically (rotated). (Only when [ROTATE DISP.] (P144) is set to [ON]) • The Direction Detection Function may not operate correctly if recording is performed with the camera aimed up or down. • Motion pictures taken with the camera held vertically are not displayed vertically. • You can only use the Direction Detection Function when using a compatible lens. (Refer to the catalogue, website etc. for compatible lenses.) Taking Pictures with a Low Camera Angle Using the Optional External Viewfinder (P162), you can adjust the viewfinder angle when recording with a low camera angle. This feature is convenient for recording low-lying subjects such as flowers, etc. VQT2G62 37 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 38 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Basic Mode switching Basic Selecting the [REC] mode, and record still pictures or motion pictures Turn the camera on. A B C D Shutter button Motion picture button [AF/MF] button [(] button OFF ON • The status indicator 2 lights when you turn this unit on 1. • Make sure the drive mode lever is set to [ ]. Switching the mode by rotating the mode dial. Align a desired mode with part E. • Rotate the mode dial slowly and surely to adjust to each mode. (The mode dial rotates 360 o) ∫ Basic Intelligent Auto Mode (P41) The subjects are recorded using settings automatically selected by the camera. Programme AE mode (P45) The subjects are recorded using your own settings. 38 VQT2G62 VQT2G62~Body1_mst.fm 39 ページ 2009年8月24日 月曜日 午後12時6分 Basic ∫ Advanced Aperture-Priority AE mode (P84) The shutter speed is automatically determined by the aperture value you set. Shutter-Priority AE mode (P85) The aperture value is automatically determined by the shutter speed you set. Manual Exposure mode (P86) The exposure is adjusted by the aperture value and the shutter speed which are manually adjusted. Motion Picture P mode (P104) Use this mode to record motion pictures with the desired settings. Custom mode (P97) Use this mode to take pictures with previously registered settings. Scene mode (P89) This allows you to take pictures that match the scene being recorded. My Colour mode (P94) Use this mode to check colouring effects, select a colour mode from among eight colour modes, and then take pictures. Setting [AFS] or [AFC] Press [AF/MF] to display the Focus mode. AF/MF Press [AF/MF] again to select either [AFS] or [AFC]. • You can also set these modes using 2/1 or the rear dial. • Refer to page 46 for information about [AFS] and [AFC]. ([AFC] will not operate with certain lenses. Refer to page 15 for details.) Press [MENU/SET] or the rear dial to set the menu. MENU /SET or VQT2G62 39 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 40 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Basic Taking a still picture Press the shutter button halfway to focus. Press the shutter button fully (push it in further), and take the picture. ∫ For more details, refer to the explanation of each recording mode. Recording a motion picture Press the motion picture button to start the recording. Press the motion picture button again to stop the recording. • Sound will go off when pressing the motion picture button indicating start/ stop of motion picture recording. Sound volume can be set in [BEEP] (P33). ∫ Recording of motion picture appropriate for each mode is possible. For more details, refer to “Recording Motion Picture” (P98). Playback the recorded still pictures or motion picture Press [(]. Press 2/1 to select the picture. ∫ For more details, refer to “Playing back Pictures” (P50), “Playing Back Motion Pictures/Pictures with Audio” (P132). 40 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 41 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Basic [REC] mode: ñ Taking pictures using the automatic function (ñ: Intelligent Auto Mode) The camera will set the most appropriate settings to match the subject and the recording conditions so we recommend this mode for beginners or those who want to leave the settings to the camera and take pictures easily. • The following functions are activated automatically. – Scene detection/[RED-EYE REMOVAL]/Face Detection/Intelligent ISO sensitivity control/ [I.EXPOSURE]/[LONG SHTR NR]/[QUICK AF]/[FOCUS PRIORITY]/Backlight Compensation Set the mode dial to [ ]. Press [AF/MF] to set [AFS] or [AFC]. • Refer to P46 for [AFS] and [AFC]. AF/MF 1 Press the shutter button halfway to focus. • The focus indication 1 (green) lights when the subject is focused. • The AF area 2 is displayed around the subject’s face by the Face Detection Function. In other cases, it is displayed at the point on the subject which is in focus. • The focus indication blinks when the subject is not focused. In this case, a picture is not taken. Press the shutter button halfway to focus on the subject again. • The focus range is different depending on used lens. – When 20 mm/F1.7 lens included in DMC-GF1C is used: 20 cm to ¶ – When 14 – 45 mm/F3.5 – 5.6 lens included in DMC-GF1K is used: 30 cm to ¶ 2 Press the shutter button fully (push it in further), and take the picture. • In Intelligent Auto Mode, [FOCUS PRIORITY] (P129) is fixed to [ON]. This means you cannot take pictures until the subject is in focus. • The access indication (P25) lights red when pictures are being recorded on the card. ∫ When taking pictures using the flash (P60) • Open the flash when the flash is to be used. •[ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] is set depending on the type of subject and brightness. • When [ ] or [ ] is displayed, the Digital red-eye correction is turned on. • Shutter speed will be slow when using [ ] or [ ]. • Flash modes cannot be switched using the menu in the Intelligent Auto Mode. VQT2G62 41 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 42 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Basic ∫ When taking pictures using the zoom (P49) ∫ To adjust the exposure and take pictures at times when the image appears too dark (P65) ∫ When taking pictures with Manual Focus (P74) ∫ When recording motion pictures (P98) ∫ To take pictures using the Face Recognition function (which stores faces of frequent subjects with information such as their names and birthdays) (P106) Scene detection When the camera identifies the optimum scene, the icon of the scene concerned is displayed in blue for 2 seconds, after which its colour changes to the usual red. ¦ > [i-PORTRAIT] [i-SCENERY] [i-MACRO] [i-NIGHT PORTRAIT] • Only when [‡] is selected [i-NIGHT SCENERY] [i-BABY]¢ • [¦] is set if none of the scenes are applicable, and the standard settings are set. • When [ ],[ ] or [ ] is selected, the camera automatically detects a person’s face, and it will adjust the focus and exposure. (Face Detection) (P72) • If a tripod is used, for instance, and the camera has judged that camera shake is minimal when the scene mode has been identified as [ ], the shutter speed will be slower than normal. Take care not to move the camera while taking pictures. • An optimum scene for the specified subject will be chosen when set to AF tracking (P43). • When [FACE RECOG.] is set to [ON], and the face similar to the registered face is detected, [R] is displayed in the top right of [ ], [ ] and [ ]. ¢ When [FACE RECOG.] is set to [ON], [ ] will be displayed for birthdays of registered faces already set only when the face of a person 3 years old or younger is detected. Note • Due to conditions such as the ones below, a different scene may be identified for the same subject. – Subject conditions: When the face is bright or dark, The size of the subject, The distance to the subject, The contrast of the subject, When the subject is moving – Recording conditions: Sunset, Sunrise, Under low brightness conditions, When the camera is shaken, When zoom is used • To take pictures in an intended scene, it is recommended that you take pictures in the appropriate recording mode. • The Backlight Compensation – Backlight refers to when light comes from the back of a subject. In this case, the subject will become dark, so this function compensates the backlight by brightening the whole of the picture automatically. Backlight compensation is automatically applied in Intelligent Auto Mode. 42 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 43 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Basic AF Tracking Function It is possible to set the focus and exposure to the specified subject. Focus and exposure will keep following the subject automatically even if it moves. 1 Press 2. • [ ] is displayed in the lower left of the screen. • AF Tracking frame is displayed in the centre of the screen. • Press 2 again to cancel. 2 Place the subject in the Tracking frame, and press the shutter button halfway to lock the subject. • AF area will turn green when the camera detects the subject. • AF tracking frame will turn yellow when you release the shutter button and the optimum scene for the locked subject will be identified. • Press 2 to cancel. Note • [FACE RECOG.] does not work during AF tracking. • Please read the Note regarding the AF tracking on P72. Settings in Intelligent auto mode • Only the following functions can be set in this mode. [REC] mode menu – [ASPECT RATIO] (P116)/[PICTURE SIZE] (P117)/[QUALITY] (P118)/[FACE RECOG.] (P118)/[STABILIZER]¢1 (Only available when a lens that supports the Stabilizer function is attached) (P118) ¢1 Only [MODE1] or [MODE2] can be set. [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu – [REC MODE] (P100)/[REC QUALITY]¢2 (P100)/[CONTINUOUS AF] (P103)/[WIND CUT] (P103) ¢2 [ ] for [MOTION JPEG] cannot be set. [CUSTOM MENU] menu – [CUST. SET MEM.] (P96)/[GUIDE LINE] (P126)/[REMAINING DISP.] (P130) [SETUP] menu – [CLOCK SET]/[WORLD TIME]/[BEEP]/[LANGUAGE] • Use the Quick Menu (P30) to set the following functions: – [STANDARD] and [STANDARD] ( ) in [FILM MODE] (P82) –[ ] and [ ] in [SELF-TIMER] (P70) • In recording still pictures, the settings of the following items are fixed. Item Settings [ECONOMY] ([POWER SAVE]) (P31) [5MIN.] Flash (P60) ‡/Œ [FLASH SYNCHRO] (P64) [1ST] [BURST RATE] (P66) [AUTO BRACKET] (P68) [H] (High speed) [STEP]: [3•1/3] [SEQUENCE]: [0/`/_] VQT2G62 43 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 44 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Basic [AF MODE] (P71) š (Set to [ [WHITE BALANCE] (P77) [AWB] ] when a face cannot be detected) [SENSITIVITY] (P80) (Intelligent ISO) (The maximum ISO sensitivity: ISO800) [METERING MODE] (P120) C [RED-EYE REMOVAL] (P119) [ON] [I.EXPOSURE] (P121) [STANDARD] [COLOR SPACE] (P123) [sRGB] [LONG SHTR NR] (P121) [ON] [PRE AF] (P128) [FOCUS PRIORITY] (P129) [ON] [AF ASSIST LAMP] (P129) [ON] • In recording motion pictures, the settings of the following items are fixed. Item Settings [AF MODE] (P71) š (This mode is set to Multi Auto Focus Mode for motion pictures when a face cannot be detected.) [WHITE BALANCE] (P77) [AWB] [SENSITIVITY] (P80) [AUTO] [METERING MODE] (P120) C [STABILIZER] (Only [MODE1] available when a lens that supports the stabilizer function is attached) (P118) [I.EXPOSURE] (P121) [STANDARD] • The following functions cannot be used. – [AUTO LCD OFF] of [ECONOMY]/[HIGHLIGHT]/AF/AE lock/White balance fine adjustment/ White Balance Bracket/Multi Film Bracket/Flash output adjustment/[EX. OPT. ZOOM]/ [DIGITAL ZOOM]/[ISO LIMIT SET]/[AUDIO REC.]/[AF/AE LOCK]/[AF/AE LOCK HOLD]/ [DIRECT AF AREA]/[SHOOT W/O LENS] • During motion picture recording, the functions disabled in other recording modes are also disabled. For details, refer to the explanations for each mode. • The other items on the [SETUP] menu and [CUSTOM MENU] menu can be set in a mode such as the Programme AE mode. What is set will be reflected in the Intelligent Auto Mode. 44 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 45 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Basic [REC] mode: ³ Taking pictures with your favourite settings ( : Programme AE mode) The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and the aperture value according to the brightness of the subject. You can take pictures with greater freedom by changing various settings in [REC] menu. • Set the drive mode lever to [ ]. Set the mode dial to [ ]. A [AF/MF] button • To change the setting while taking pictures, refer to “Using the [REC] Mode Menu” (P115) or “Using the [CUSTOM MENU]” (P126). Press [AF/MF] to set [AFS] or [AFC]. • Refer to P46 for [AFS] and [AFC]. Press the shutter button halfway to focus. • The focus indication (green) lights when the subject is focused. • The focus indication blinks when the subject is not focused. In this case, a picture is not taken. Press the shutter button halfway to focus on the subject again. • The focus range is different depending on used lens. – When 20 mm/F1.7 lens included in DMC-GF1C is used: 20 cm to ¶ – When 14 –45 mm/F3.5 – 5.6 lens included in DMC-GF1K is used: 30 cm to ¶ • If the [SENSITIVITY] is set to [ISO100] and the aperture value is set to F1.7 (when 20 mm/F1.7 lens included in DMC-GF1C is attached) or the aperture value is set to F3.5 (when 14 –45 mm/F3.5 – 5.6 lens included in DMC-GF1K is attached), the shutter speed is automatically set between about 30 seconds and 1/4000th of a second. Press the halfway pressed shutter button fully to take a picture. • A picture is not taken until the subject is brought into focus. • If you want to press the shutter button fully to take a picture even when the subject is not focused, set [FOCUS PRIORITY] in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu to [OFF]. (P129) • The access indication lights (P25) red when pictures are being recorded on the card. ∫ To adjust the exposure and take pictures at times when the image appears too dark (P65) ∫ To adjust the colours and take pictures at times when the image appears too red (P77) ∫ When recording motion pictures (P98) VQT2G62 45 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 46 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Basic Fix the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway (AFS) Press [AF/MF] to set [AFS]. • “AFS” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Single”. The focus is adjusted when you press the shutter button halfway. • Normally use the [AFS]. • Focus during the burst is fixed at the first picture. Refer to P66 for details. AF/MF Continuously focusing on a subject (AFC) This mode allows you to compose a picture more easily by continuously focusing on the movement of the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway. When taking pictures of a moving subject, the camera predicts the movement of the subject and focuses on it. (motion prediction) • [AFC] will not operate with certain lenses. For details, refer to page 15. • 20 mm/F1.7 interchangeable lens included in the DMC-GF1C cannot be set to [AFC]. Press [AF/MF] to set [AFC]. • “AFC” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Continuous”. The AF/MF camera is continuously focusing on the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway. • It may take time to focus on the subject if you rotate the zoom ring from Wide to Tele or suddenly change the subject from a distant one to a nearby one. • Focusing will continue even after the shutter button is pressed during the burst. Refer to P66 for details. • Set the [PRE AF] of [CUSTOM MENU] menu item (P128) when you would like to set focus before pressing the shutter button halfway. • Focus sound will not go off in [AFC] even if the subject comes into focus. Also, AF area will not be displayed if the AF mode is set to [ ]. • When brightness is not enough, the mode will turn to [AFS] and in that case the AF area will be displayed and the focus sound will beep when the subject comes into focus. • Press the shutter button halfway again when it is difficult to focus on the subject. Take a picture with Manual Focus (MF) Press [AF/MF] to set [MF]. • For details, refer to P74. 46 VQT2G62 AF/MF DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 47 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Basic Focusing Align the subject to the screen, and then press the shutter button halfway. A B C DE Focus When the subject is When the subject focused is not focused Focus indication On AF area Green Blinks — Sound¢2 Beeps 2 times — F A Focus indication B AF area (normal) C AF area (when using the digital zoom or when it is dark) D Aperture value¢1 E Shutter speed¢1 F ISO sensitivity ¢1 It will flash in red when appropriate exposure is not achieved. (Except when flash is activated) ¢2 Sound volume can be set in [BEEP] (P33). • When the AF mode is set to [ ], and multiple AF areas (up to 23 areas) have turned on, all the AF areas that have turned on are focused. If you would like to take a picture focused on a certain area, switch the AF mode to [Ø]. (P71) • Focus sound will not beep if the Focus Mode is set to [AFC]. Also, the AF area will not be displayed if the AF mode is set to [ ]. When the subject is not in focus If the subject is not in the centre of composition when the AF mode is set to [Ø], it is possible to move the AF area. (P73) ∫ Take picture with different focus modes depending on the subject (P71) ∫ Subjects and recording conditions which are difficult to focus • Fast-moving subjects, extremely bright subjects or subjects without contrast • When recording subjects through windows or near shiny objects • When it is dark or when jitter occurs • When the camera is too close to the subject or when taking a picture of both distant and near subjects Preventing jitter (camera shake) When the jitter alert [ ] appears, use [STABILIZER] (Only available when a lens that supports the Stabilizer function is attached) (P118), a tripod, the self-timer (P70) or the remote shutter (DMW-RSL1; optional) (P166). • Shutter speed will be slower particularly in the following cases. Keep the camera still from the moment the shutter button is pressed until the picture appears on the screen. We recommend using a tripod. – Slow sync. – Slow sync./Red-eye Reduction – [NIGHT PORTRAIT], [NIGHT SCENERY] and [PARTY] in the Scene Mode (P89) – When you set to a slow shutter speed VQT2G62 47 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 48 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Basic Programme Shift In Programme AE mode, you can change the preset aperture value and shutter speed without changing the exposure. This is called Programme Shift. You can make the background more blurred by decreasing the aperture value or record a moving subject more dynamically by slowing the shutter speed when taking a picture in Programme AE mode. 1 2 A B Press the shutter button halfway and display the aperture value and shutter speed value on the screen. While the values are displayed (about 10 seconds), perform the Programme Shift by rotating the rear dial. • It will switch between Programme Shift operation and Exposure Compensation operation (P65) every time the rear dial is pressed while the values are displayed. • Rotate the rear dial to display the [EXPO.METER] B. (P127) • The Programme Shift indication A appears on the screen when Programme Shift is activated. • To cancel Programme Shift, turn the camera off or rotate the rear dial until the Programme Shift indication disappears. ∫ Example of Programme Shift (When 20 mm/F1.7 lens included in DMC-GF1C is used) (A): Aperture value (B): Shutter speed 1 Programme Shift amount 2 Programme Shift line chart 3 Programme Shift limit 1 (A) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 (Ev) 2 15 2.8 16 4 17 5.6 18 8 19 11 20 16 22 4 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 (B) Note • If the exposure is not adequate when the shutter button is pressed halfway, the aperture value and shutter speed turn red and blink. • Programme Shift is cancelled and the camera returns to normal Programme AE mode if more than 10 seconds pass after Programme Shift is activated. However, the Programme Shift setting is memorised. • Depending on the brightness of the subject, Programme Shift may not be activated. • Programme Shift is not possible when the [SENSITIVITY] is set to [ ]. 48 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 49 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Basic [REC] mode: Taking Pictures with the Zoom Using the Optical Zoom/Using the Extra Optical zoom (EZ)/ Using the Digital Zoom You can zoom-in to make people and objects appear closer or zoom-out to record landscapes in wide angle. • The 20 mm/F1.7 interchangeable lens supplied with the DMC-GF1C does not support the zoom ring function. To make subjects appear closer use (Tele) Rotate the zoom ring towards Tele. (P12) To make subjects appear further away use (Wide) Rotate the zoom ring towards Wide. (P12) To enlarge further, set the [EX. OPT. ZOOM] in the [REC] mode menu to [ON], or set the [DIGITAL ZOOM] to [2k] or [4k] for further enlargement. When the [EX. OPT. ZOOM] (max. 2 times) is used, set the aspect ratio (X/Y/W/ ) to numbers of recordable pixels other than [L]. ∫ Types of zooms Feature Focus range/ Maximum magnification Picture quality Conditions Optical zoom Extra Optical Zoom (EZ) Digital zoom When 20 mm/F1.7 lens included in DMC-GF1C is used 4k 8¢k [including Extra Optical 20 mm/1k 2k¢ Zoom 2k] When 14 – 45 mm/F3.5 – 5.6 lens included in DMC-GF1K is used 12.8k [including Optical Zoom 3.2k] 14 mm to 45 mm/ 6.4k¢ 3.2k 25.4¢k [including Extra Optical Zoom 2k] The higher the magnification No deterioration No deterioration level, the greater the deterioration. Set the [EX. OPT. ZOOM] in [REC] mode menu [DIGITAL ZOOM] (P122) on (P122) to [ON], and then the [REC] mode menu is set to None select number of [2k] or [4k]. recordable pixels with [ ] (P117) ¢ The magnification level differs depending on [PICTURE SIZE] and [ASPECT RATIO] setting. ∫ Extra Optical Zoom mechanism Example: When it is set to [ ] (equal to 3.1 million pixels), it will take the picture using the 3.1 million pixels in the centre out of the 12 million pixels of the imaging device, resulting to be more of a telephoto picture. VQT2G62 49 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 50 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Basic Note • “EZ” is an abbreviation of “Extra Optical Zoom”. • If you use the zoom function after focusing on the subject, focus on the subject again. • When using the digital zoom, [STABILIZER] (Only available when a lens that supports the stabilizer function is attached) may not be effective. • When using the digital zoom, we recommend using a tripod and the self-timer (P70) for taking pictures. • The [AF MODE] is fixed to [Ø] when using the digital zoom. • The Extra Optical Zoom cannot be used in the following cases. – In Intelligent Auto Mode – When recording motion pictures – When [QUALITY] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ] • [DIGITAL ZOOM] cannot be used in the following cases. – In Intelligent Auto Mode – In Scene mode – When [ ] is set – When [QUALITY] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ] Playing back Pictures Press [(]. A [(] button Press 2/1 to select the picture. 2: Play back the previous picture 1: Play back the next picture • Speed of picture forwarding/rewinding changes depending on the playback status. • If you press and hold 2/1, you can play back the pictures in succession. ∫ To finish playback Press [(] again, press the motion picture button or press the shutter button halfway. Note • This camera complies with the DCF standard “Design rule for Camera File system” established by JEITA “Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association” and with Exif “Exchangeable Image File Format”. Files which do not comply with the DCF standard cannot be played back. 50 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 51 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Basic Changing the Information Displayed on the playback screen Press [DISPLAY] to switch the monitor screen. A [DISPLAY] button • When the menu screen appears, the [DISPLAY] button is not activated. During Playback Zoom (P53), while playing back motion pictures (P132) and during a slide show (P134), you can only select “Normal display B” or “No display F”. • Refer to P59 for information about the histogram D. 1/9 0 WB ISO P STANDARD 10:00 P F1.7 30 B C D E F ¢ 0 100 30 F1.7 STD s RGB AWB AWB 100 AFS F1.7 1.DEC.2009 100-0001 0 30 ISO100 1/9 100-0001 Normal display Detailed information display Histogram display Highlight display¢ No display This is displayed if [HIGHLIGHT] (P32) in the [SETUP] menu is set to [ON]. Displaying Multiple Screens (Multi Playback) Rotate the rear dial left. A 1 screen>12 screens>30 screens>Calendar screen display A Number of the selected picture and the total number of recorded pictures • Rotate the rear dial right to return to the previous screen. • Pictures are not rotated for display. • Pictures displayed using [ ] cannot be played back. ∫ To return to normal playback 1 Press 3/4/2/1 to select a picture. 2 • An icon will be displayed depending on the recorded picture and the settings. Press [MENU/SET] or the rear dial. • The picture that was selected will appear. VQT2G62 51 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 52 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Basic Displaying Pictures by Recording Date (Calendar Playback) You can display pictures by recording date. Rotate the rear dial left to display the calendar screen. Press 3/4/2/1 to select the date to be played back. 3/4: Select the month 2/1: Select the date • If there were no pictures recorded during a month, the month is not displayed. Press [MENU/SET] or the rear dial to display the pictures that were recorded on the selected date. MENU /SET or • Rotate the rear dial left to return to the calendar screen display. Press 3/4/2/1 to select a picture and then press [MENU/SET] or the rear dial. • The picture that was selected will appear. Note • The recording date of the picture selected in the playback screen becomes the date selected when the calendar screen is first displayed. • If there are multiple pictures with the same recording date, the first picture recorded on that day is displayed. • You can display the calendar between January 2000 and December 2099. • If the date is not set in the camera, the recording date is set as the 1st January, 2009. • If you take pictures after setting the travel destination in [WORLD TIME], the pictures are displayed by the dates at the travel destination in Calendar Playback. 52 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 53 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Basic Using the Playback Zoom Rotate the rear dial right. 1k>2k>4k>8k>16k • When you rotate the rear dial left after enlarging the picture, the magnification becomes lower. • When you change the magnification, the zoom position indication A appears for about 1 second, and the position of the enlarged section can be moved by pressing 3/4/2/1. • The more a picture is enlarged, the more its quality deteriorates. • When you move the position to be displayed, the zoom position indication appears for about 1 second. A ∫ Switching the displayed image while maintaining the Playback Zoom You can switch the displayed image while maintaining the same zoom magnification and zoom position for the Playback Zoom. Switch to picture select operation by pressing the rear dial during Playback Zoom, and select pictures with 2/1. • It will switch between picture select operation and move zoom position operation every time the rear dial is pressed during Playback Zoom. Note • You can also delete the recording information etc. on the LCD monitor/optional external viewfinder during Playback Zoom by pressing [DISPLAY]. • If you want to save the enlarged picture, use the trimming function. (P142) • The Playback Zoom may not operate if pictures have been recorded with other equipment. • The zoom magnification and the zoom position are cancelled when the camera is turned off (including power save mode). • The zoom position returns to the centre in the following images. – Images with different aspect ratios – Images with different numbers of recorded pixels – Images with a different rotation direction (when [ROTATE DISP.] is set to [ON]) • Playback Zoom cannot be used during motion picture playback or pictures with audio playback. VQT2G62 53 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 54 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Basic Deleting Pictures Once deleted, pictures cannot be recovered. Press [(]. To delete a single picture Select the picture to be deleted, and then press [‚]. A [(] button B [DISPLAY] button C [‚] button Press 2 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET]. MENU /SET To delete multiple pictures (up to 50) or all the pictures Press [‚]. Press 3/4 to select [DELETE MULTI] or [DELETE ALL] and then press [MENU/SET]. • [DELETE ALL] > step 5. Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture, and then press [DISPLAY] to set. (Repeat this step.) • [‚] appears on the selected pictures. If [DISPLAY] is pressed again, the setting is cancelled. Press [MENU/SET]. Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET] to set. 54 VQT2G62 DISPLAY DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 55 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Basic ∫ When [DELETE ALL] has been selected with the [FAVORITE] (P137) setting The selection screen is displayed again. Select [DELETE ALL] or [ALL DELETE EXCEPTÜ], press 3 to select [YES] and delete the pictures. ([ALL DELETE EXCEPTÜ] cannot be selected if no pictures have been set as [FAVORITE].) Note • Do not turn the camera off while deleting (while [‚] is displayed). Use a battery with a sufficient power or the AC adaptor (P167). • If you press [MENU/SET] while deleting pictures using [DELETE MULTI], [DELETE ALL] or [ALL DELETE EXCEPT Ü], the deleting will stop halfway. • Depending on the number of pictures to be deleted, it may take some time to delete them. • If pictures do not conform to the DCF standard or are protected (P146), they will not be deleted even if [DELETE ALL] or [ALL DELETE EXCEPTÜ] is selected. VQT2G62 55 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 56 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Advanced (Recording pictures) Switching the display of the LCD Monitor/Optional External Viewfinder Switching the displayed information Press [DISPLAY] to change. A [DISPLAY] button • When the menu screen appears, the [DISPLAY] button is not activated. LCD monitor display With the [LCD DISP.STYLE] (P126) of the [CUSTOM MENU] menu, you can choose the displayed screen on the LCD monitor to display in [ ] (LCD monitor style) or [ ] (viewfinder style). When [ ] is set STD AFS P −3 0 +3 AUTO AWB 9 B Normal display¢1, 2 C No display¢1 D Turned off When [ ] is set STD AFS P −3 0 +3 AUTO AWB AWB 9 AFS P −3 0 +3 AUTO AWB AWB E Normal displayidetailed information¢1, 2 F Normal display¢1 G Turned off 56 VQT2G62 9 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 57 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Optional external viewfinder display (P162) With the [LVF DISP.STYLE] (P131) of the [CUSTOM MENU] menu, you can choose the displayed screen on the Optional External Viewfinder (P162) to display in [ ] (viewfinder style) or [ ] (LCD monitor style). When [ ] is set A Normal display¢1 B Normal displayidetailed information¢1, 2 STD AFS When [ P −3 0 +3 9 9 AUTO AWB AFS P −3 0 +3 9 9 AUTO AWB −3 0 +3 AUTO AWB 9 ] is set C No display¢1 D Detailed information¢1, 2 STD AFS P ¢1 Guide lines are displayed when the [GUIDE LINE] of the [CUSTOM MENU] menu is set to anything except [OFF]. It is possible to move the position of the guide line using the Quick Menu when it is set to [ ]. (P58) ¢2 Histograms are displayed when the [HISTOGRAM] of the [CUSTOM MENU] menu is set to [ON]. It is possible to move the position of the histogram using the Quick Menu. (P59) Note • In [NIGHT PORTRAIT], [NIGHT SCENERY] and [ILLUMINATIONS] in Scene Mode (P89), the guide line is grey. VQT2G62 57 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 58 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) ∫ Recording guide line When you align the subject on the horizontal and vertical guide lines or the cross point of these lines, you can take pictures with well-designed composition by viewing the size, the slope and the balance of the subject. A [ ]: This is used when dividing the entire screen into 3k3 for taking pictures with a well-balanced composition. B [ ]: This is used when you want to position the subject at the exact centre of the screen. C [ ]: Position of the guide line can be set. It is used to take well balanced pictures of subjects off the centre of the image. ∫ Set the position of the guide line with [ ] • Set the [GUIDE LINE] in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu to [ 1 2 ]. (P126) Press [Q.MENU] to display the Quick Menu. (P30) Press 2/1 to select guide line, and then press [MENU/SET]. • You can also use the rear dial to set. • Selected item will be displayed in orange in the Quick Menu screen, and the guide line itself will be displayed in orange when the guide line is selected. 3 4 5 Press 3/4/2/1 to set the position. • The guide line returns to the centre when [‚] is pressed. Press [MENU/SET] to finish the setting. Press [Q.MENU] to close the Quick Menu. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the Quick Menu. • Position of the guide line can be set from the [CUSTOM MENU] menu too. 58 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 59 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) ∫ About the Histogram A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis (black to white) and the number of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis. It allows you to easily check a picture’s exposure. Examples of histogram 1 Properly Exposed 2 Under Exposed 3 Overexposed STD STD STD ¢ Histogram AFS P 1.7 500 −3 0 +3 AUTO AWB 9 AFS P 1.8 1000 −3 0 +3 AUTO AWB 9 AFS P 1.7 250 −3 0 +3 AUTO AWB 9 ∫ Set the position of the histogram • Set the [HISTOGRAM] in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu to [ON]. (P126) 1 2 Press [Q.MENU] to display the Quick Menu. (P30) Press 2/1 to select histogram, and then press [MENU/SET]. • You can also use the rear dial to set. • Selected item will be displayed in orange in the Quick Menu screen, and the frame of the histogram will be displayed in orange when the histogram is selected. 3 4 5 Press 3/4/2/1 to set the position. Press [MENU/SET] to finish the setting. Press [Q.MENU] to close the Quick Menu. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the Quick Menu. • Position of the histogram can be set from the [CUSTOM MENU] menu too. Note • When the recorded picture and the histogram do not match each other under the following conditions, the histogram is displayed in orange. – When the manual exposure assistance is other than [n0EV] during Exposure Compensation or in the manual exposure mode – When the flash is activated – When the flash is closed • When the brightness of the screen is not correctly displayed in dark places • When the exposure is not adequately adjusted • The histogram is an approximation in recording mode. • The histogram displayed in this camera does not match histograms displayed by picture editing software used in PCs etc. • Histogram is displayed in R (red), G (green), B (blue), and Y (luminance) during the playback. VQT2G62 59 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 60 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [REC] mode: Taking Pictures using the Built-in Flash A To open the flash B To close the flash Press the flash until it clicks. • Be sure to close the flash when not in use. • The flash setting is fixed to [Œ] while the flash is closed. Note • Be careful not to catch a finger when closing a flash bulb. Switching to the appropriate flash setting Applicable modes: Set the built-in flash to match the recording. • Open the flash. Select [FLASH] in the [REC] mode menu. (P28) Press 3/4 to select a mode and press [MENU/SET]. • For information about flash settings that can be selected, refer to “Available flash settings by recording mode”. (P61) Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu. Item Description of settings The flash is automatically activated when the recording conditions make ‡: AUTO it necessary. The flash is automatically activated when the recording conditions make it necessary. : It is activated once before the actual recording to reduce the red-eye AUTO/Red-eye phenomenon (eyes of the subject appearing red in the picture) and then ¢ reduction activated again for the actual recording. • Use this when you take pictures of people in low lighting conditions. The flash is activated every time regardless of the recording conditions. ‰: Forced flash ON • Use this when your subject is back-lit or under fluorescent light. The flash is activated every time regardless of the recording conditions. : Forced ON/Red-eye Simultaneously it reduces the red-eye phenomenon. reduction¢ • Use this when your subject is back-lit or under fluorescent light. 60 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 61 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) When taking pictures against a dark background landscape, this feature will slow the shutter speed when the flash is activated. Dark background landscape will appear brighter. : Slow sync. • Use this when you take pictures of people in front of a dark background. • Using a slower speed can cause motion blur. Using a tripod can enhance your photos. When taking pictures against a dark background landscape, this feature will slow the shutter speed when the flash is activated. Dark background landscape will appear brighter. : Slow sync./Red-eye Simultaneously it reduces the red-eye phenomenon. reduction¢ • Use this when you take pictures of people in front of a dark background. • Using a slower speed can cause motion blur. Using a tripod can enhance your photos. The flash is not activated in any recording conditions. Œ: Forced flash OFF • Use this when you take pictures in places where the use of the flash is not permitted. The flash is activated twice. The interval between the first and second flash is longer when [ ], [ ] or [ ] is set. The subject should not move until the second flash is activated. ¢ [RED-EYE REMOVAL] (P119) on the [REC] Mode menu is set to [ON], [ ] appears on the flash icon. ∫ About the Digital Red-Eye Correction When [RED-EYE REMOVAL] (P119) has been set to [ON] and Red-Eye Reduction ([ ], [ ], [ ]) is selected, Digital Red-Eye Correction is performed whenever the flash is used. The camera automatically detects red-eye and corrects the picture. (Only available when [AF MODE] is set to [š] and face detection is active) • Under certain circumstances, red-eye cannot be corrected. • In the following cases, Digital Red-Eye Correction does not work. – When the flash setting is set to [‡], [‰] or [Œ] – When [RED-EYE REMOVAL] is set to [OFF] – When [AF MODE] is set to anything except [š] ∫ Available flash settings by recording mode The available flash settings depend on the recording mode. (±: Available, —: Not available, ¥: Initial setting of scene mode) ‡ ñ ±¢ ³ ± ± ± ´ ± ² — Œ ‡ — — ‰ — — — ± ¥ ± ± — — — ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ¥ — ± — — — ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ¥ — ± — — — ± Œ ± ± ± — — ± ¥ — ± — — — ± — ± ± — — ± — — — — ¥ ± — — — — — — ± . — / — — — — — — ¥ — — — — — — ± — — — — — — ¥ ± ¥ ± — — — ± ± ¥ ± — — — ± ± * + ± , — ¥ ± — — — ± — — — — — ¥ — — — — — — ¥ ¥ — ± — — — ± - 1 ‰ : ; ± í ¥ 2 — ï — ¥ ± — — — — ± — — — ± — — ± — ¥ ± — — — — — ¥ VQT2G62 61 VQT2G62~Body1_mst.fm 62 ページ 2009年8月25日 火曜日 午後1時51分 Advanced (Recording pictures) ¢ When [‡] is selected, [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] is set depending on the type of subject and brightness. • The flash setting may change if the recording mode is changed. Set the flash setting again if necessary. • The flash setting is memorised even if the camera is turned off. However, the Scene Mode flash setting is reset to the initial setting when the Scene Mode is changed. • Available flash settings are those that were set for still picture recording. • Flash will not be activated when recording motion picture. ∫ The available flash range to take pictures • The available flash range is an approximation. ISO sensitivity When 20 mm/F1.7 lens included in DMC-GF1C is used When 14– 45 mm/F3.5 – 5.6 lens included in DMC-GF1K is used Available flash range Available flash range AUTO 40 cm to 7.0 m¢ ISO100 ISO200 Wide Tele 1.0 m to 3.4 m¢ 30 cm to 2.1 m¢ 40 cm to 3.5 m 1.0 m to 1.7 m 30 cm to 1.0 m 50 cm to 4.9 m 1.0 m to 2.4 m 30 cm to 1.5 m ISO400 80 cm to 7.0 m 1.0 m to 3.4 m 30 cm to 2.1 m ISO800 1.1 m to 9.9 m 1.0 m to 4.8 m 30 cm to 3.0 m ISO1600 1.6 m to 14.1 m 1.0 m to 6.8 m 50 cm to 4.2 m ISO3200 2.3 m to 19.9 m 1.1 m to 9.6 m 70 cm to 6.0 m ¢ When the [ISO LIMIT SET] (P121) is set to [OFF] • At the time of flash photography, when distance with the subject is near, the flash light is interrupted with lens and a part of picture being taken becomes dark. Check the distance between the camera and the subject when taking a picture. The distance with subject from which the flash light is interrupted differs according to the lens used. – When 20 mm/F1.7 lens included in DMC-GF1C is attached: 40 cm or less – When 14 – 45 mm/F3.5 – 5.6 lens included in DMC-GF1K is attached: 1.0 m or less (Wide)/30 cm or less (Tele) ∫ Shutter speed for each flash setting Flash setting Shutter speed (Sec.) ‡ 1/30¢1 ‰ 1/30¢2 to 1/160th Flash setting to 1/4000th Shutter speed (Sec.) 1 to 1/4000th Œ 60¢3 to 1/4000th ¢1 This becomes 60 seconds in Shutter-Priority AE mode ¢2 This becomes 60 seconds in Shutter-Priority AE mode and B (Bulb) in the Manual Exposure Mode. ¢3 This becomes B (Bulb) in the Manual Exposure Mode. • When the flash is activated, the shutter speed cannot be set to faster than 1/160th of a second. • In Intelligent Auto Mode, shutter speed changes depending on the identified scene. 62 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 63 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Note • Do not bring the flash too close to objects or close the flash while it is activated. The objects may be discoloured by its heat or lighting. • Do not close the flash soon after the flash is activated prior to taking pictures due to AUTO/ Red-Eye Reduction etc. It causes a malfunction. • When you take a picture beyond the available flash range, the exposure may not be adjusted properly and the picture may become bright or dark. • When the flash is being charged, the flash icon blinks red, and you cannot take a picture even when you press the shutter button fully. • The white balance may not be properly adjusted if the flash level is insufficient for the subject. • When you use certain lenses, light from the flash may be blocked or fail to cover the lens field of view, causing dark areas to appear in the resulting pictures. • When taking a picture with the flash, we recommend removing the lens hood. In some cases it may not allow the scene to be illuminated properly. • It may take time to charge the flash if you repeat taking a picture. Take a picture after the access indication disappears. • The Red-Eye Reduction effect differs between people. Also, if the subject was far away from the camera or was not looking at the first flash, the effect may not be evident. • When you attach an external flash, it takes priority over the built-in flash. Refer to P164 for the external flash. Adjust the flash output Applicable modes: Adjust the flash output when the subject is small, or the reflectivity is very high or low. Select [FLASH ADJUST.] in the [REC] mode menu. (P28) Press 2/1 to set the flash output and then press [MENU/SET]. • You can adjust from [j2 EV] to [i2 EV] in steps of [1/3 EV]. • Select [0 EV] to return to the original flash output. • You can also use the rear dial to set. Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu. Note • [i] or [j] is displayed on the flash icon in the LCD monitor/optional external viewfinder when the flash level is adjusted. • The flash output setting is memorised even if the camera is turned off. VQT2G62 63 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 64 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Setting to the 2nd Curtain Synchro Applicable modes: 2nd curtain synchro activates the flash just before the shutter closes when taking pictures of moving objects such as cars using a slow shutter speed. Select [FLASH SYNCHRO] in the [REC] mode menu. (P28) Press 4 to select [2ND] and then press [MENU/SET]. Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu. Item Effect The normal method when taking pictures with the flash. 1st curtain synchro The light source appears behind the subject and picture becomes 2nd curtain synchro dynamic. Note • Set it to [1ST] normally. • [2nd] is displayed in the flash icon on the LCD monitor/optional external viewfinder if you set [FLASH SYNCHRO] to [2ND]. • The flash sync. settings are also effective when using an external flash. (P164) • When a fast shutter speed is set, the effect of [FLASH SYNCHRO] may deteriorate. • You cannot set [ ], [ ] or [ ] when [FLASH SYNCHRO] is set to [2ND]. 64 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 65 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [REC] mode: Compensating the Exposure Use this function when you cannot achieve appropriate exposure due to the difference in brightness between the subject and the background. Look at the following examples. Under exposed Properly exposed Compensate the exposure towards positive. Overexposed Compensate the exposure towards negative. Press the rear dial to switch to Exposure Compensation operation. Rotate the rear dial to compensate the exposure. A Exposure Compensation value B [EXPO.METER] • Select [0] to return to the original exposure. • Rotate the rear dial to display the [EXPO.METER]. (P127) (However, it does not appear in ñ mode.) A B Take a picture. Note • EV is an abbreviation of [Exposure Value]. It refers to the amount of light given to the CCD by the aperture value and the shutter speed. • The set exposure value is memorised even if the camera is turned off. However, the exposure value during the Intelligent Auto Mode is not memorised. • The compensation range of the exposure will be limited depending on the brightness of the subject. • Rotate the rear dial slowly but surely. • When the aperture and shutter speed values are displayed in the screen in the Programme AE mode, Programme Shift operation and Exposure Compensation operation is switched every time the rear dial is pressed. • In the Aperture-Priority AE mode, Aperture Setting Operation (P84) and Exposure Compensation operation is switched every time the rear dial is pressed. • In the Shutter-Priority AE mode, Shutter Speed Setting Operation (P85) and Exposure Compensation operation is switched every time the rear dial is pressed. • In Quick Menu (P30) in [ ] (LCD monitor style), after selecting the Exposure Compensation display using 2/1 or the rear dial, you can compensate the exposure with 3/4. • In Quick Menu in [ ] (Finder style), after selecting the Exposure Compensation display using the rear dial or 2/1, pressing the rear dial or [MENU/SET] will allow you to compensate the exposure with the rear dial or 2/1. VQT2G62 65 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 66 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [REC] mode: Taking Pictures using Burst Mode Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter button is pressed. Select the ones you really like from among the pictures you have taken. Set the drive mode lever to [ ]. A Focus on the subject and take a picture. A When Burst Mode is set to high speed [H]. • Hold down the shutter button fully to activate the burst mode. ∫ Changing the burst speed 1 2 Select [BURST RATE] in the [REC] mode menu. (P28) Press 3/4 to select the burst speed and then press [MENU/SET]. Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. 3 • You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu. [H] (High speed) Burst speed (pictures/second) ¢1 With RAW files Without RAW files [L] (Low speed) 3 2 ¢2 4 to 7 Depends on the remaining capacity of the card¢2 ¢1 Number of recordable pictures ¢2 Pictures can be taken until the capacity of the card becomes full. However the burst speed will become slower halfway. The exact timing of this depends on the aspect ratio, the picture size, the setting for the quality and the type of card used. • First burst speed has no relation with the transfer speed of the card. • The burst speed values given above apply when the shutter speed is 1/60 or faster and when the flash is not activated. • The Burst Mode speed may become slower depending on the following settings. – [SENSITIVITY] (P80)/[PICTURE SIZE] (P117)/[QUALITY] (P118)/[FOCUS PRIORITY] (P129)/Focus mode • Refer to P118 for information about RAW files. 66 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 67 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) ∫ Focusing in Burst Mode The focus changes depending on the setting for [FOCUS PRIORITY] (P129) in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu and the focus mode setting. Focus mode AFS AFC¢1 MF Focus Priority ON OFF Focus At the first picture ON Normal focusing¢2 OFF Predicted focusing¢3 — Focus set with Manual Focus ¢1 When subject is dark, the focus is fixed on the first picture. ¢2 The burst speed may become slower because the camera is continuously focusing on the subject. ¢3 Burst speed takes priority, and focus is estimated within possible range. Note • [AFS] or [AFC] will not operate with certain lenses. For details, refer to page 15. • We recommend using the remote shutter (DMW-RSL1; optional) when you want to keep the shutter button pressed fully while taking pictures in Burst Mode. Refer to P166 for information about the remote shutter. • When the burst speed is set to [H], the exposure and white balance are fixed at the settings used for the first picture for the subsequent pictures as well. When the burst speed is set to [L], they are adjusted each time you take a picture. • If you are following a moving subject while taking pictures in a place (landscape) indoors, outdoors etc. where there is a large difference between the light and shade, it may take time until the exposure is stable. If burst is used at this time, the exposure may not become optimal. • Since the shutter speed becomes slower in dark places, the burst speed (pictures/second) may become slower. • The Auto Review function is activated regardless of the Auto Review setting. (Will not enlarge/ hold) You cannot set the Auto Review function in the [SETUP] menu. • When the flash is activated, you can take only 1 picture. • White Balance Bracket (P79) will record 3 pictures at 1 recording, so it will take longer to be able to take next picture. • Maximum of 3 films will be recorded depending on the Multi Film Bracket setting during the Multi Film Bracket recording (P83). • The Burst Mode is disabled during recording of the motion pictures. VQT2G62 67 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 68 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [REC] mode: Taking Pictures using Auto Bracket Maximum of 7 pictures will be recorded with different exposure settings following the Exposure Compensation range every time the shutter button is pressed. You can select the picture with the desired exposure among different exposures. With Auto Bracket [STEP]: [3•1/3], [SEQUENCE]: [0/s/r] 1st picture 2nd picture 3rd picture d0 EV j1/3 EV i1/3 EV Set the drive mode lever to [ ]. Focus on the subject and take a picture. A • If you press and hold the shutter button, the number of pictures that you set is taken. • The Auto Bracket indication A blinks until the number of pictures that you set is taken. • The picture count is reset to [0] if you change the Auto Bracket setting, change the setting on the drive mode lever or turn the camera off before all the pictures that you set are taken. ∫ Changing the settings for [STEP] and [SEQUENCE] in Auto Bracket 1 2 68 Select [AUTO BRACKET] in the [REC] mode menu. (P28) Press 3/4 to select [STEP] or [SEQUENCE] and then press 1. VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 69 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) 3 Press 3/4 to select the setting and then press [MENU/SET]. Item Settings [3•1/3] (3 pictures) [3•2/3] (3 pictures) [STEP] Item [SEQUENCE] Settings [0/`/_] [`/0/_] [5•1/3] (5 pictures) [5•2/3] (5 pictures) [7•1/3] (7 pictures) [7•2/3] (7 pictures) 4 Press [MENU/SET] twice to close the menu. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu. Note • When taking pictures using Auto Bracket after setting the Exposure Compensation range, the pictures taken are based on the selected Exposure Compensation range. • The exposure may not be compensated with Auto Bracket depending on the brightness of the subject. • The Auto Review function is activated regardless of the Auto Review setting. (Will not enlarge/ hold) You cannot set the Auto Review function in the [SETUP] menu. • When the flash is activated, you can take only 1 picture. • Set number of pictures cannot be recorded if the recordable number of pictures is less than set number of pictures. • Settings for Multi Film Bracket have priority during the Multi Film Bracket recording (P83). • The Auto Bracket will be disabled during recording of the motion pictures. VQT2G62 69 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 70 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [REC] mode: Taking Pictures with the Self-timer Set the drive mode lever to [ë]. Press the shutter button halfway to focus and then press it fully to take the picture. A When self-timer is set to [ A ]. • A picture is not taken until the subject is brought into focus. • If you want to press the shutter button fully to take a picture even when the subject is not focused, set [FOCUS PRIORITY] in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu to [OFF]. (P129) • The self-timer indicator B blinks and the shutter is activated after 10 seconds (or 2 seconds). • If you press [MENU/SET] while taking a picture with the self-timer, it is cancelled. • When [ ] is selected, the self-timer indicator blinks again after the first and the second pictures are taken and the shutter is activated 2 seconds after it blinks. ∫ Changing the time setting for the self-timer 1 Select [SELF-TIMER] in the [REC] mode menu. (P28) 2 Press 3/4 to select the mode and then press [MENU/SET]. Item Settings 10 seconds 10 seconds/3 pictures 2 seconds • If you set [ 3 ], after 10 seconds the camera takes 3 pictures at about 2 second intervals. Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu. Note • When using a tripod etc., setting the self-timer to 2 seconds is a convenient way to avoid the jitter caused by pressing the shutter button. • We recommend using a tripod when recording with the self-timer. • Depending on the recording conditions, the recording interval may become more than 2 seconds when [ ] is selected. • The flash output may not be constant when [ ] is set. • Operation will be same as [ ] even if it is set to [ ] while Multi Film Bracket recording (P83). • Use the Quick Menu (P30) to set when in Intelligent Auto Mode. • Self-timer cannot be set to [ ] in Intelligent Auto Mode. • The self-timer will be disabled during recording of the motion pictures. 70 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 71 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [REC] mode: Setting the method used to focus (AF mode) This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be selected. Select the mode that matches the recording conditions and the composition. Press [AF/MF] to set [AFS] or [AFC]. • [AFS] or [AFC] will not operate with certain lenses. For details, refer to page 15. Press 2 ( mode. ) and then press 2/1 to select AF • You can also use the rear dial to select. Effect Item [š]: Face detection The camera automatically detects the person’s face. The focus and exposure can then be adjusted to fit that face no matter what portion of the picture it is in. (max. 15 areas) [ Focus and exposure can be adjusted to a specified subject. Focus and exposure will keep on following the subject even if it moves. (Dynamic tracking) ]: AF Tracking [ ]: 23-area-focusing Up to 23 points for each AF area can be focused. This is effective when the subject is not in the centre of the screen. (AF area frame will be same as image aspect ratio setting) The camera focuses on the subject in the AF area on the [Ø]: 1-area-focusing screen. Position and size of the AF area can be changed. Press [MENU/SET] to close. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to close. Note • When the subject is not in the centre of the composition in [Ø], you can bring the subject into the AF area, fix the focus and exposure by pressing the shutter button halfway, move the camera to the composition you want with the shutter button pressed halfway, and then take the picture. (Only available when [AFS] has been set by pressing [AF/MF]) • The camera is focusing on all the AF areas using [ ] when multiple AF areas (max. 23 areas) light at the same time. If you want to determine the focus position to take pictures, switch the AF mode to [Ø]. • If the AF mode is set to [š] or [ ], the AF area is not displayed until the picture is brought into focus. Also, if you set the Focus Mode to [AFC] in [ ], AF area will not be displayed even if the subject comes into focus. • When it is set to [ ] or [ ] during motion picture recording, it will switch to Multi Auto Focus Mode for motion pictures. AF area is not displayed at this time. • The camera may detect the subjects other than a person as the face. In this case, switch the AF mode to any modes other than [š] and then take a picture. • [FACE RECOG.] only works when [š] is set. VQT2G62 71 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 72 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) • It is not possible to set [š] in the following cases. – [FOOD], [NIGHT SCENERY] and [ILLUMINATIONS] in the Scene Mode. • The [AF MODE] is fixed to [Ø] when using the digital zoom. • AF area will be fixed to a small point in [PERIPHERAL DEFOCUS] in Scene Mode. ∫ About [š] (Face Detection) When the camera detects a person’s face, the following colour AF area is displayed. Yellow: When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the frame turns green when the camera is focused. White: Displayed when more than one face is detected. Other faces that are the same distance away as faces within the yellow AF areas are also focused. • When [š] is selected and [METERING MODE] is set to multiple [C], the camera will adjust the exposure to suit the person’s face. • Under certain picture-taking conditions including the following cases, the facial recognition function may fail to work, making it impossible to detect faces. [AF MODE] is switched to [ – When the face is not facing the camera – When the face is at an angle – When the face is extremely bright or dark – When there is little contrast on the faces – When the facial features are hidden behind sunglasses, etc. – When the face appears small on the screen – When there is rapid movement – When the subject is other than a human being – When the camera is shaking Setting up [ Bring the subject to the AF tracking frame, and press the shutter button halfway to lock the subject. ]. ] (AF Tracking) Before locking Locked A AF tracking frame (White) B AF tracking frame (Yellow) A B • When the subject is recognised, AF area will turn green and the subject will be locked. Focus and exposure will be fixed automatically and continuously in accordance with the movement of the subject when you release the shutter button (Dynamic tracking). AF area will be displayed in yellow in this case. • AF tracking is cancelled when [MENU/SET ] or 2 is pressed. Take the picture. Note • If it fails to lock, AF area will flash in red, and disappear. Try to lock again. 72 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 73 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) • AF Tracking will not operate when it has failed to AF track. AF mode will be switched to [Ø] in that case. • [FACE RECOG.] does not work when AF tracking is active. • In the following cases, [ ] operates as [Ø] – When the film mode is [STANDARD]( ), [DYNAMIC]( ), [SMOOTH]( ) – When My Colour Mode is [MONOCHROME] • Dynamic tracking function may not work in the following cases: – When the subject is too small – When the recording location is too dark or bright – When the subject is moving too fast – When the background has the same or similar colour to the subject – When jitter is occurring – When zoom is operated Setting the AF area AF area can be moved when [Ø] is selected. The size of AF area can also be changed. • You can also set from the Quick Menu. (P30) Select [Ø] and then press 4. • AF area setting screen is displayed. It will return to previous screen by pressing [DISPLAY]. Press 3/4/2/1 to move the AF area. • You can set to arbitrary position of the screen. (It cannot be set to edge of the screen) • The AF area returns to the centre when [‚] is pressed. Rotate the rear dial to change the size of AF area. A Rear dial right: Enlarge Rear dial left: Shrink • It can be changed to 4 different sizes of “spot” A, “normal” B, “large” C, and “extra large” D. Press [MENU/SET] to set. BC D ∫ Move the AF area easily while taking pictures When the [DIRECT AF AREA] (P128) in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu is set to [ON] while [Ø] is selected, it is possible to move the AF area directly with 3/4/2/1. It is also possible to change the size of AF area by rotating the rear dial in the screen to set the position. • [SENSITIVITY] (P80), [Fn BUTTON SET] (P31), [AF MODE] (P71), or [WHITE BALANCE] (P77) cannot be set with 3/4/2/1. Make the setting with the Quick Menu (P30). Note • The spot metering target can also be moved to match the AF area when using [Ù]. (P120) • Set the size of AF area to “normal”, “large”, or “extra large” when it is hard to focus using the “spot”. • [DIRECT AF AREA] is fixed to [OFF] in My Colour Mode and in all scene modes other than [PERIPHERAL DEFOCUS]. • [DIRECT AF AREA] is disabled during motion picture recording. VQT2G62 73 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 74 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [REC] mode: Taking Pictures with Manual Focus Use this function when you want to fix the focus or when the distance between the lens and the subject is determined and you do not want to activate auto focus. Press [AF/MF] to set [MF]. • [ ] is displayed on a screen for about 5 seconds. Rotate the focus ring to focus on the subject. • Screen will be enlarged about 5 times as MF assist. • The enlarged area can be moved by pressing 3/4/2/1. • MF assist disappears about 10 seconds after you stop pressing 3/4/2/1 or rotating the focus ring. • MF assist is enlarged from 5 times to 10 times when the rear dial is rotated right. It will return to 5 times by rotating the rear dial left. Take the picture. ∫ MF ASSIST If [MF ASSIST] (P129) of [CUSTOM MENU] menu is set to [OFF], an enlarged screen will not be displayed as MF assist, even if focus ring is rotated. To display the MF assist, press 2 and then press [MENU/SET] for enlarged display. 1 Press 2 to display the MF assist screen. 2 Press 3/4/2/1 to change the position of the MF assist screen. • The following will return the MF assistance to the original position. – When the Focus Mode is set to other than [MF] – Changing [ASPECT RATIO] or [PICTURE SIZE]. – Turning the camera off. 3 4 Press [MENU/SET] to magnify the MF assist screen. • Rotate the focus ring to focus on the subject. • The enlarged area can be moved by pressing 3/4/2/1. • MF assist is enlarged from 5 times to 10 times when the rear dial is rotated right. It will return to 5 times by rotating the rear dial left. Press [MENU/SET] to close MF assist. • The screen returns to the previous screen. ∫ Technique for Manual Focus 1 Rotate the focus ring to focus on the subject. 2 Rotate it a little more. 3 Finely focus on the subject by rotating the focus ring slowly in reverse. 74 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 75 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) ∫ About the focus distance reference mark The focus distance reference mark is a mark used to measure the focus distance. Use this when taking pictures with Manual Focus or taking close-up pictures. A Focus distance reference mark (With the flash is closed) B Focus distance reference line C 20 cm (When 20 mm/F1.7 lens included in DMC-GF1C is used) D 30 cm (When 14 –45 mm/ F3.5 –5.6 lens included in DMC-GF1K is used) • If you are taking close-up pictures – We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer (P70). – The effective focus range (depth of field) is significantly narrowed. Therefore, if the distance between the camera and the subject is changed after focusing on the subject, it may become difficult to focus on it again. – The resolution of the periphery of the picture may decrease slightly. This is not a malfunction. Note • When the MF assist is started by 2, MF assist will continue to display even after 10 seconds has past without operating the focus ring or 3/4/2/1. • If you use the zoom function after focusing on the subject, focus on the subject again. • The MF assist does not appear when using the digital zoom or recording motion pictures. • Even if 2 is pressed in My Colour Mode, the MF assist screen is not displayed. • After cancelling Power Save Mode, focus on the subject again. [REC] mode: Fixing the Focus and the Exposure (AF/AE Lock) This is useful when you want to take a picture of a subject outside the AF area or the contrast is too strong and you cannot achieve appropriate exposure. ∫ Fixing the exposure only Align the screen with the subject. Press and hold [AF/AE LOCK] to fix the exposure. A [AF/AE LOCK] button • The aperture value and the shutter speed light. • If you release [AF/AE LOCK], AE Lock is cancelled. VQT2G62 75 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 76 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) While pressing [AF/AE LOCK], move the camera as you compose the picture. B AE lock indication B Press the shutter button halfway to focus on the subject and then press it fully. ∫ Fixing the focus or the focus/the exposure 1 2 3 Select [AF/AE LOCK] in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu. (P28) Press 3/4 to select [AF] or [AF/AE] and then press [MENU/SET]. Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu. Taking pictures when [AF] or [AF/AE] is set 1 Aim the lens at the subject. 2 Press and hold [AF/AE LOCK] to fix the focus and the exposure. • When [AF] is selected, [AFL], the focus indication, aperture value, the shutter speed light when the subject is focused. • When [AF/AE] is selected, [AFL], [AEL], the focus indication, aperture value and the shutter speed light when the subject is focused and the exposure is set. • If you release [AF/AE LOCK], AF/AE Lock is cancelled. 3 While pressing [AF/AE LOCK], move the camera to the composition you would like to take and then press the shutter button fully. Note • If you set [AF/AE LOCK HOLD] in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu to [ON], you can fix the focus and the exposure even if you release [AF/AE LOCK] after pressing it. (P127) • The brightness of the image displayed on the LCD monitor/optional external viewfinder will be also locked when the AE lock is performed. • AF Lock only is effective when taking pictures in Manual Exposure Mode. • AE Lock only is effective during Manual Focus or Preview Mode. • AE Lock and AF lock can be used during motion picture recording, but AE/AF lock cannot be performed again during motion picture recording. During motion picture recording only cancellation of AE/AF lock can be performed. • The exposure is set, even if the brightness of the subject changes. • The subject can be focused again by pressing the shutter button halfway even when AE is locked. • Programme Shift can be set even when AE is locked. 76 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 77 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [REC] mode: Adjusting the White Balance In sunlight, under incandescent lights or in other such conditions where the colour of white takes on a reddish or bluish tinge, this item adjusts to the colour of white which is closest to what is seen by the eye in accordance with the light source. Press 1 ( ). Press 2/1 to select the white balance and then press [MENU/SET] to set. • You can also use the rear dial to set. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to set. Item Recording conditions [AWB] Automatic adjustment [V] When taking pictures outdoors under a clear sky [Ð] When taking pictures outdoors under a cloudy sky [î] When taking pictures outdoors in the shade [Ñ] When taking pictures under incandescent lights ]¢ [ [ [ 1 ]/[ ] When taking pictures with the flash only 2 ] When using the preset white balance When using the preset colour temperature setting ¢ It will operate as [AWB] during motion picture recording. ∫ Auto White Balance Depending on the conditions prevailing when pictures are taken, the pictures may take on a reddish or bluish tinge. Furthermore, when a multiple number of light sources are being used or there is nothing with a colour close to white, Auto White Balance may not function properly. In a case like this, set the white balance to a mode other than [AWB]. 1 Auto white balance will work within this range. 2 Blue sky 3 Cloudy sky (Rain) 4 Shade 5 TV screen 6 Sunlight 7 White fluorescent light 8 Incandescent light bulb 9 Sunrise and sunset 10 Candlelight KlKelvin colour Temperature 2) 3) 4) 1) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) VQT2G62 77 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 78 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Note • The optimal white balance will differ depending on the type of halogen lighting being recorded under so use [AWB], [ 1 ] or [ 2 ]. • The white balance might not be adjusted for a subject that the flash cannot reach when the flash is used. • The white balance setting is memorised even if the camera is turned off. (However, the white balance setting for a Scene Mode returns to [AWB] when the Scene Mode is changed.) • White Balance is fixed to [AWB] in following conditions. – In Intelligent Auto Mode – My Colour Mode – In [SCENERY], [ARCHITECTURE], [FOOD], [NIGHT PORTRAIT], [NIGHT SCENERY], [ILLUMINATIONS], [PARTY], [SUNSET] in scene mode • The camera will not be able to operate with 3/4/2/1 if the [DIRECT AF AREA] (P128) is set to [ON]. Set using the Quick Menu (P30). Setting the white balance manually Set the white balance value. Use to match the condition when taking photographs. Select [ 1 ] or [ 2 ] and then press 3. Aim the camera at a sheet of white paper etc. so that the frame in the centre is filled by the white object only and then press [MENU/SET]. Note • You may not be able to properly set a white balance if the subject is too bright or too dark. In this case, adjust the subject to an appropriate brightness and then reset the white balance. Setting the colour temperature You can set the colour temperature manually for taking natural pictures in different lighting conditions. The colour of light is measured as a number in degrees Kelvin. As the colour temperature increases, the picture becomes more bluish. As the colour temperature decreases, the picture becomes more reddish. Select [ ] and then press 3. Press 3/4 to select the colour temperature and then press [MENU/SET]. • You can set a colour temperature from [2500K] to [10000K]. • You can also use the rear dial to set. 78 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 79 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Finely adjusting the white balance [ ] You can finely adjust the white balance when you cannot acquire the desired hue by setting the white balance. Select the white balance and then press 4. Press 3/4/2/1 to adjust the white balance and then press [MENU/SET]. 2: 1: 3: 4: A (AMBER: ORANGE) B (BLUE: BLUISH) G_ (GREEN: GREENISH) M` (MAGENTA: REDDISH) Note • If you finely adjust the white balance to A (amber), the white balance icon on the LCD monitor/ optional external viewfinder will change to orange. If you finely adjust the white balance to B (blue), the white balance icon on the LCD monitor/Optional External Viewfinder will change to blue. • If you finely adjust the white balance to G_ (green) or M` (magenta), [_] (green) or [`] (magenta) appears beside the white balance icon on the LCD monitor/optional external viewfinder. • Press [‚] to return to the centre point. • Select the centre point if you are not finely adjusting the white balance. • The white balance fine adjustment setting is reflected in the picture when using the flash. • You can finely adjust the white balance independently for each white balance item. • The white balance fine adjustment setting is memorised even if the camera is turned off. • The white balance fine adjustment level returns to the standard setting (centre point) in the following cases. – When you reset the white balance in [ 1 ] or [ 2 ] – When you reset the colour temperature manually in [ ] White Balance Bracket Bracket setting is performed based on the adjustment values for the white balance fine adjustment, and 3 pictures with different colours are automatically recorded when the shutter button is pressed once. Finely adjust the white balance in step 2 of the “Finely adjusting the white balance” procedure, and rotate the rear dial to set the bracket. Rear dial right: Horizontal (A to B) Rear dial left: Vertical (Gi to Mj) Press [MENU/SET]. • You can also use the rear dial to set. VQT2G62 79 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 80 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Note •[ ] is displayed in white balance icon in the LCD monitor/optional external viewfinder when the White Balance Bracket is set. • The White Balance Bracket setting is released when the power has been turned off (including power save mode). • Pictures can be taken with White Balance Bracket regardless of the drive mode settings. • You will only hear the shutter sound once. • White Balance Bracket cannot be set when the [QUALITY] is set to [ ], [ ], or [ ]. • White Balance Bracket will be disabled when the Multi Film Bracket is set. • White Balance Bracket does not work when recording motion pictures. [REC] mode: Setting the Light Sensitivity This allows the sensitivity to light (ISO sensitivity) to be set. Setting to a higher figure enables pictures to be taken even in dark places without the resulting pictures coming out dark. Press 3 ( ). Press 3/4/2/1 to select the ISO sensitivity and then press [MENU/SET] to set. • You can also use the rear dial to set. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to set. ISO sensitivity Recording location (recommended) 100 3200 When it is light (outdoors) When it is dark Shutter speed Slow Fast Noise Less Increased ISO sensitivity Settings AUTO¢ The ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted according to the brightness. ¢ The ISO sensitivity is adjusted according to the movement of the subject and the brightness. (Intelligent) 100/200/400/800/1600/3200 80 VQT2G62 The ISO sensitivity is fixed to various settings. (When the [ISO INCREMENTS] in [REC] mode menu (P122) is set to [1/3 EV], items of ISO sensitivity that can be set will increase.) DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 81 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) ¢ When the [ISO LIMIT SET] of [REC] mode menu (P121) is set to anything except [OFF], it is set automatically within the value set in [ISO LIMIT SET]. It is set as following when the [ISO LIMIT SET] is set to [OFF]. • When [AUTO] is selected, ISO sensitivity is adjusted automatically depending on brightness within a maximum setting of [ISO400]. • When setting to [ ], ISO sensitivity will adjust automatically depending on brightness within the maximum setting of [ISO800]. ([ISO400] when the flash is used) • The ISO sensitivity will be set to [AUTO] when recording motion pictures. Also, the [ISO LIMIT SET] will not operate. ∫ About [ ] (Intelligent ISO sensitivity control) The camera automatically sets the optimum ISO sensitivity and shutter speed to suit the movement of the subject and brightness of the scene to minimise the jitter of the subject. • The shutter speed is not fixed when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It is continuously changing to match the movement of the subject until the shutter button is pressed fully. Confirm the actual shutter speed on the information display for the picture being played back. Note • The higher the value set for the ISO sensitivity, the more the jitter is reduced but the greater the amount of picture noise. • Refer to P62 for the flash range. • Depending on the brightness and how fast the subject is moving, jitter may not be avoided even if [ ] is selected. • Movements may not be detected when a moving subject is small, when a moving subject is at the edge of the screen or when a subject has moved at the very moment when the shutter button was pressed fully. • The setting is fixed to [ ] in the following cases. – In [SPORTS],[BABY1]/[BABY2] and [PET] in Scene Mode • Programme Shift cannot be activated when the ISO sensitivity is set to [ ]. • You cannot select [ ] in Shutter-Priority AE Mode and Manual Exposure Mode. Also, you cannot select [AUTO] in Manual Exposure Mode. • To avoid picture noise, we recommend reducing the ISO sensitivity, setting [NOISE REDUCTION] in [FILM MODE] towards [_] or setting the items except [NOISE REDUCTION] towards [`] to take pictures. (P83) • The camera will not be able to operate with 3/4/2/1 if the [DIRECT AF AREA] (P128) is set to [ON]. Set using the Quick Menu (P30). VQT2G62 81 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 82 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [REC] mode: Change tone of the colour for the picture to be taken (Film Mode) [You can only select [STANDARD] and [STANDARD] ( ) in [ ], [¿] mode.] Just as each type of film for film cameras has its own colour tone and contrast characteristics, Film Mode allows you to select up to 9 different “digital films”, colour tones, in the same way as you would select different films for film cameras. Select different settings in Film Mode to match the photo look you wish to achieve. Select [FILM MODE] from the [REC] mode menu, and press 1. (P28) Press 2/1 to select an item. • You can also use the rear dial to select. • When you press [DISPLAY] on the screen shown right, explanations about each Film Mode are displayed. (When you press [DISPLAY] again, the screen returns to the previous screen.) Press [MENU/SET] to set. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to set. Item Effect [STANDARD] (COLOUR) This is the standard setting. [DYNAMIC] (COLOUR) The saturation and contrast of the stored colours are increased. [NATURE] (COLOUR) Brighter red, green and blue. Enhanced beauty of nature. [SMOOTH] (COLOUR) The contrast is lowered for smoother and clearer colour. [NOSTALGIC] (COLOUR) Lower saturation and contrast. Reflecting passage of time. [VIBRANT] (COLOUR) Higher saturation and contrast than dynamic. [STANDARD] ( This is the standard setting. ) [DYNAMIC] ( ) The contrast is increased. [SMOOTH] ( ) Smooths the picture without losing the skin texture. [MY FILM 1]/[MY FILM 2] The saved setting is used. [MULTI FILM] It will take pictures changing the type of film in accordance with the setting every time the shutter button is pressed. (Up to 3 pictures) Note • You can also set from the Quick Menu. (P30) • Use the Quick Menu (P30) to set when in Intelligent Auto Mode. • In Film Mode, the camera may do something equivalent to pull processing or push processing to create a picture with particular characteristics. The shutter speed may become very slow at this time. 82 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 83 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Adjusting each Film Mode to the desired setting Press 2/1 to select a film. Press 3/4 to select an item and 2/1 to adjust. • You can also use the rear dial to adjust. • Registered settings are memorised even if the camera is turned off. Press 3/4 to select the [MEMORY] and then press [MENU/SET]. • You can register 2 settings. ([MY FILM 1] and [MY FILM 2]) (After registering, the Film Mode name that was registered previously is displayed.) • [STANDARD] is registered in [MY FILM 1] and [MY FILM 2] at the time of purchase. Item [CONTRAST] Effect Increases the difference between the brightness and the [r] darkness in the picture. [s] [SHARPNESS] [SATURATION] Decreases the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture. [r] The picture is sharply defined. [s] The picture is softly focused. [r] The colours in the picture become vivid. [s] The colours in the picture become natural. [r] The noise reduction effect is enhanced. Picture resolution may deteriorate slightly. [s] The noise reduction effect is reduced. You can obtain pictures with higher resolution. [NOISE REDUCTION] Note • Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places. To avoid picture noise, we recommend setting [NOISE REDUCTION] towards [_] or setting the items except [NOISE REDUCTION] towards [`] to take pictures. • If you adjust a Film Mode, [_] is displayed beside the Film Mode icon on the LCD monitor/ optional external viewfinder. • You cannot adjust [SATURATION] in the black and white settings in Film Mode. • Film Mode cannot be adjusted in the Intelligent Auto Mode and Scene Mode. Multi Film Bracket It will take pictures changing the type of film in accordance with the setting every time the shutter button is pressed. (Up to 3 pictures) • You can also set from the Quick Menu. (P30) VQT2G62 83 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 84 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Press 2/1 to select [MULTI FILM]. Select either [MULTI FILM 1], [MULTI FILM 2], or [MULTI FILM 3] with 3/4, and then select the film to be set for each with 2/1. • You can also use the rear dial to set. • [OFF] can be selected only for [MULTI FILM 3]. Press [MENU/SET] to set. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to set. Focus on the subject and take a picture. • It will continuously take pictures by keeping the shutter button pressed when it is set to burst mode. (Up to 3 pictures) • When using a self-timer, up to 3 pictures with set film will be taken if the shutter button is pressed. (It will operate same as [ ] even if it is set to [ ].) • Multi film indication ([ ]) displayed on the LCD monitor/optional external viewfinder will flash until all pictures of preset amount are taken. Note • [STANDARD] is registered in [MULTI FILM 1], [MULTI FILM 2] and [OFF] is registered in [MULTI FILM 3] at the time of purchase. • White Balance Bracket will be disabled when the Multi Film Bracket is set. • Motion pictures are recorded with the settings for the [MULTI FILM 1] setting. [REC] mode: ±´ Taking pictures by specifying the aperture/ shutter speed [ ] Aperture-priority AE Set the aperture value to a higher number when you want a sharp focus background. Set the aperture value to a lower number when you want a soft focus background. Set the mode dial to [ ]. Rotate the rear dial to set the aperture value. • It will switch between aperture setting operation and Exposure Compensation operation every time the rear dial is pressed. • Rotate the rear dial to display the [EXPO.METER]. (P127) Take a picture. 84 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 85 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [ ] Shutter-priority AE When you want to take a sharp picture of a fast moving subject, set with a faster shutter speed. When you want to create a trail effect, set to a slower shutter speed. Set the mode dial to [ ]. Rotate the rear dial to set the shutter speed. • It will switch between shutter speed setting operation and Exposure Compensation operation every time the rear dial is pressed. • Rotate the rear dial to display the [EXPO.METER]. (P127) Take a picture. Note • It will be a normal motion picture recording when recording a motion picture. • The brightness of the LCD monitor/optional external viewfinder and the recorded pictures may differ. Check the pictures on the playback screen. • Set the aperture value to a higher number when the subject is too bright in Aperture-Priority AE Mode. Set the aperture value to a lower number when the subject is too dim. • When you use a lens with an aperture ring, the setting for the rear dial becomes effective if you rotate the aperture ring to the [A] position and the aperture ring setting takes priority if you rotate the aperture ring to a position other than [A] in Aperture-Priority AE Mode. • The aperture value and the shutter speed displayed on the screen turn red and blink when the exposure is not adequate. • We recommend using a tripod when the shutter speed is slow. • When the flash is activated, the shutter speed cannot be set to faster than 1/160th of a second in Shutter-Priority AE Mode. (P62) • If you press the shutter button fully when the shutter speed is slow, the shutter speed on the screen counts down in Shutter-Priority AE Mode. • [ ] and [ ] cannot be set for Shutter-Priority AE Mode. • The [SENSITIVITY] is automatically set to [AUTO] when you switch the recording mode to Shutter-Priority AE Mode while the [SENSITIVITY] is set to [ ] (Intelligent). VQT2G62 85 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 86 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [REC] mode: ² Taking picture by setting the exposure manually Determine the exposure by manually setting the aperture value and the shutter speed. The Manual Exposure Assistance appears on the lower portion of the screen to indicate the exposure. Set the mode dial to [²]. Rotate the rear dial to set the aperture and shutter speed. • It will switch between aperture setting operation and shutter speed setting operation every time the rear dial is pressed. • Rotate the rear dial to display the [EXPO.METER]. (P127) • You can also switch to manual focus by pressing [AF/MF] and selecting [MF]. (P74) Press the shutter button halfway. • Set the aperture value and the shutter speed again when the exposure is not adequate. Take the picture. 86 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 87 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) ∫ Manual Exposure Assistance The exposure is adequate. Set to faster shutter speed or larger aperture value. Set to slower shutter speed or smaller aperture value. • The manual exposure assistance is an approximation. We recommend checking the pictures on the playback screen. ∫ About [B] (Bulb) If you set the shutter speed to [B], the shutter stays open while the shutter button is pressed fully (up to about 4 minutes). The shutter closes if you release the shutter button. Use this when you want to keep the shutter open for a long time to take pictures of fireworks, a night scene etc. • If you set the shutter speed to [B], [B] is displayed on the screen. • When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to [B], use a sufficiently charged battery. (P20) • We recommend using a tripod or the remote shutter (DMW-RSL1; optional) when you take pictures with the shutter speed set to [B]. Refer to P166 for information about the remote shutter. • When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to [B], noise may become visible. To avoid picture noise, we recommend setting [LONG SHTR NR] in the [REC] mode menu to [ON] before taking pictures. (P121) • The manual exposure assistance does not appear. Note • It will be a normal motion picture recording when recording a motion picture. • The brightness of the LCD monitor/optional external viewfinder may differ from the brightness of the actual pictures. Check the pictures using the playback screen. • If the exposure is not adequate, the aperture value and the shutter speed turn red and blink when the shutter button is pressed halfway. • [‡], [ ], [ ] and [ ] for flash cannot be set. • The [SENSITIVITY] is automatically set to [ISO100] when you switch the recording mode to Manual exposure while the [SENSITIVITY] is set to [AUTO] or [ ] (Intelligent). • If you press the shutter button fully when the shutter speed is slow, the shutter speed on the screen counts down. • When you use a lens with an aperture ring, the aperture ring setting takes priority. VQT2G62 87 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 88 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [REC] mode: Confirm the effects of aperture and shutter speed (Preview Mode) Confirm the effects of aperture You can check the depth of field (effective focus range) before taking a picture by closing the leaf shutter to the aperture value you set. Press [ ] A (preview button). • Preview screen is displayed. It will return to previous screen when [ ] is pressed. ∫ Depth of field properties ¢1 Aperture value Small Focus length of the lens Tele Wide Distance to the subject Near Distant Shallow (Narrow)¢2 Deep (Wide)¢3 Depth of field (effective focus range) Large ¢1 Recording conditions ¢2 Example: When you want to take a picture with a blurred background etc. ¢3 Example: When you want to take a picture with everything in focus including the background etc. Confirm the effects of shutter speed Movement can be confirmed by displaying the actual picture that will be taken with that shutter speed. When the shutter speed is set for high speed, display in the shutter speed preview will be displayed like a time-release film. It is used in cases such as stopping the movement of running water. Press [DISPLAY] while displaying the preview screen. • Shutter speed preview screen is displayed. It will return to previous screen by pressing [DISPLAY] again. DISPLAY Note • Operation method of [ ] can be changed with [PREVIEW HOLD] of [CUSTOM MENU] menu (P128). • It is possible to record while in Preview Mode. • Range for shutter speed effect check is 8 seconds to 1/1000th of a second. 88 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 89 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [REC] mode: ¿ Taking pictures that match the scene being recorded ( : Scene mode) When you select a scene mode to match the subject and recording situation, the camera sets the optimal exposure and hue to obtain the desired picture. Set the mode dial to [ ]. Press 3/4/2/1 to select the scene mode. • You can also use the rear dial to select. Press [MENU/SET] to set. • The menu screen is switched to the recording screen in the selected scene mode. ∫ About the information • If you press [DISPLAY] when selecting a scene mode in step 2, explanations about each scene mode are displayed. (If you press [DISPLAY] again, the screen returns to the scene mode menu.) Note • To change the scene mode, press [MENU/SET], and return to above step 2 by pressing 1, while selecting the scene mode menu [ ] by pressing 3/4/2/1. • The scene mode flash setting is reset to the initial setting when the scene mode is changed and then used. • When you take a picture with a scene mode that is not adequate for the purpose, the hue of the picture may differ from the actual scene. • The following items cannot be set in scene mode because the camera automatically adjusts them to the optimal setting. – [SENSITIVITY]/Items other than [STANDARD] and [STANDARD] ( ) in Film Mode/ [FLASH SYNCHRO]/[METERING MODE]/[I.EXPOSURE]/[ISO LIMIT SET]/[DIGITAL ZOOM] * [PORTRAIT] When taking pictures of people outdoors during the day, this mode allows you to improve the appearance of the persons concerned and make their skin tones look healthier. ∫ Technique for Portrait Mode To make this mode more effective: 1 Rotate the zoom ring as far as possible to Tele. (when a lens with a zoom function is used) 2 Move close to the subject to make this mode more effective. Note • The initial setting for [AF MODE] is [š]. VQT2G62 89 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 90 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) + [SOFT SKIN] When taking pictures of people outdoors during the daytime, this mode enables the texture of their skin to appear even softer than with [PORTRAIT]. (It is effective when taking pictures of people from the chest up.) ∫ Technique for Soft Skin Mode To make this mode more effective: 1 Rotate the zoom ring as far as possible to Tele. (when a lens with a zoom function is used) 2 Move close to the subject to make this mode more effective. Note • If a part of the background etc. is a colour close to skin colour, this part is also smoothed. • This mode may not be effective when there is insufficient brightness. • The initial setting for [AF MODE] is [š]. , [SCENERY] This allows you to take pictures of a wide landscape. Note • The flash setting is fixed to [Œ]. [ARCHITECTURE] This setting takes sharp photographs of architecture. The guide lines are displayed. (P58) Note • The flash setting is fixed to [Œ]. - [SPORTS] Set here when you want to take pictures of sports scenes or other fast-moving events. Note • [INTELLIGENT ISO] is activated, and maximum ISO sensitivity level becomes [ISO800]. [PERIPHERAL DEFOCUS] This mode makes it easy to pick out the subject on which to focus and blurs the background to make the subject stand out. ∫ Setting the AF area 1 2 Move the AF area using 3/4/2/1. • You can position the AF area anywhere on the screen (except at the edges). • Press [‚] to return the AF area to the centre of the screen. Take the picture. Note • It will be a normal motion picture recording during the motion picture recording. • Quick AF is performed automatically. • Set the [WHITE BALANCE] (P77) using the Quick Menu (P30). • AF area setting screen is displayed by pressing 3/4/2/1. • The obtained effects will differ depending on factors such as the distance to the subject and background, and the type of lens used. For best results, we recommend getting as close as possible to the subject when taking pictures. (P75) 90 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 91 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [FLOWER] Flowers outdoors are recorded with natural colours in macro settings. The guide lines are displayed. (P58) ∫ Technique for Flower Mode • We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer. • We recommend setting the flash to [Œ] when you take pictures at close range. Note • The focus range is different depending on lens used. Refer to “About the focus distance reference mark” on P75 for the focus range. • When a subject is close to the camera, the effective focus range is significantly narrowed. Therefore, if the distance between the camera and the subject is changed after focusing on the subject, it may become difficult to focus on it again. • Close-up regions are prioritised when taking pictures, and so time is required to focus if you take a picture of a distant subject. • When you take pictures at close range, the resolution of the periphery of the picture may decrease slightly. This is not a malfunction. • If the lens becomes dirty with fingerprints or dust, the lens may not be able to focus on the subject correctly. [FOOD] You can take pictures of food with a natural hue without being affected by the ambient light in restaurants etc. ∫ Technique for Food Mode • We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer. • We recommend setting the flash to [Œ] when you take pictures at close range. Note • Refer to [FLOWER] for other information about this mode. [OBJECTS] You can take clear and vivid pictures of accessories or small objects in a collection. ∫ Technique for Object Mode • We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer. • We recommend setting the flash to [Œ] when you take pictures at close range. Note • Refer to [FLOWER] for other information about this mode. . [NIGHT PORTRAIT] This allows you to take pictures of a person and the background with near real-life brightness. ∫ Technique for Night Portrait Mode • We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer. • Ask the subject not to move for a period of about one second after the picture is taken. VQT2G62 91 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 92 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Note • During Motion Picture Recording, low light settings are used, which will provide better pictures in dimly lit rooms or at nightfall. • Open the flash. (You can set to [ ].) • The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is due to signal processing and is not a malfunction. • Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places. • The initial setting for [AF MODE] is [š]. / [NIGHT SCENERY] This allows you to take vivid pictures of the nightscape. ∫ Technique for NIGHT SCENERY Mode • We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer. Note • During Motion Picture Recording, low light settings are used, which will provide better pictures in dimly lit rooms or at nightfall. • The flash setting is fixed to [Œ]. • The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is due to signal processing and is not a malfunction. • Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places. [ILLUMINATIONS] Illuminations are photographed beautifully. ∫ Technique for ILLUMINATIONS Mode • We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer. Note • During Motion Picture Recording, low light settings are used, which will provide better pictures in dimly lit rooms or at nightfall. • The flash setting is fixed to [Œ]. • The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is due to signal processing and is not a malfunction. • Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places. : [BABY1]/; [BABY2] This takes pictures of a baby with a healthy complexion. When you use the flash, the light from it is weaker than usual. It is possible to set different birthdays and names for [BABY1] and [BABY2]. You can select to have these appear at the time of playback, or have them stamped on the recorded image using [TEXT STAMP] (P139). 92 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 93 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) ∫ Birthday/Name setting 1 Press 3/4 to select [AGE] or [NAME] and then press 1. 2 Press 3/4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET]. 3 Enter the birthday or name. Birthday: Name: 2/1: Select the items (year/month/day). 3/4: Setting. [MENU/SET]: Exit. For details on how to enter characters, read the [TITLE EDIT] section on P138. • When the birthday or name is set, [AGE] or [NAME] is automatically set to [ON]. • If [ON] is selected when the birthday or name has not been registered, the setting screen appears automatically. 4 Press [MENU/SET] to finish. • You can also use the rear dial to set. ∫ To cancel [AGE] and [NAME] Select the [OFF] setting in step 2 of the “Birthday/Name setting” procedure. Note • During Motion Picture Recording, settings for [PORTRAIT] are used. • The age and name can be printed out using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO 4.0 HD Edition” bundled software on the CD-ROM (supplied). • If [AGE] or [NAME] is set to [OFF] even when the birthday or name has been set, the age or name will not be displayed. Before taking pictures, set [AGE] or [NAME] to [ON]. • Intelligent ISO sensitivity control is activated, and maximum ISO sensitivity level becomes [ISO400]. • If the camera is turned on with [BABY1]/[BABY2] set, the age and name are displayed at the lower left of the screen for about 5 seconds, along with the current date and time. • If the age is not properly displayed, check the clock and birthday settings. • The Birthday Setting and Name Setting can be reset with [RESET]. • The initial setting for [AF MODE] is [š]. í [PET] Select this when you want to take pictures of a pet such as a dog or a cat. You can set your pet’s birthday and name. You can select to have these appear at the time of playback, or have them stamped on the recorded image using [TEXT STAMP] (P139). For information about [AGE] or [NAME], refer to [BABY1]/[BABY2] on P92. Note • It will be a normal motion picture recording during the motion picture recording. • The initial setting for the AF assist lamp is [OFF]. • Intelligent ISO sensitivity control is activated, and maximum ISO sensitivity level becomes [ISO800]. • The initial setting for [AF MODE] is [ ]. • Refer to [BABY1]/[BABY2] for other information about this mode. 2 [PARTY] Select this when you want to take pictures at a wedding reception, an indoor party etc. This allows you to take pictures of people and the background with near real-life brightness. VQT2G62 93 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 94 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) ∫ Technique for Party mode • Open the flash. (You can set to [ ] or [ ].) • We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer for taking pictures. Note • The initial setting for [AF MODE] is [š]. ï [SUNSET] Select this when you want to take pictures of a sunset view. This allows you to take vivid pictures of the red colour of the sun. Note • The flash setting is fixed to [Œ]. [REC] mode: Taking pictures while adjusting colour ( : My Colour Mode) You can take pictures with a desired effect by previewing the subject on the LCD monitor or optional external viewfinder (Live View) (P162) and setting the desired effect. Set the mode dial to [ ]. Press 2/1 to select an item. • You can also use the rear dial to set. Item [EXPRESSIVE] Effect This is a pop art style image effect that emphasises the colour. This is a soft image effect that gives the appearance of a tarnished [RETRO] photograph. This is an image effect that uses a cool, bright light to give a feeling [PURE] of freshness. (The image will come out bright and slightly bluish) This is an image effect that creates a tranquil atmosphere and [ELEGANT] projects a feeling of stateliness. (The image will come out slightly dark and amberish) This is an image effect that captures the subject using tones [MONOCHROME] characteristic of black and white photography, and with a whisper of colour. This is an impressive image effect that pictures dark areas to bright [DYNAMIC ART] areas with appropriate brightness, together with enhancements on colours. This is an image effect that enhances the subject in the shade as a [SILHOUETTE] black silhouette by utilising the background colours of the sky or sunset etc. [CUSTOM]¢ The colour effects can be set according to your preferences. ¢For [CUSTOM] settings, refer to page 95. 94 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 95 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Press [MENU/SET] to set. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to set. • Recording screen is displayed. ∫ Readjust the My Colour settings Return to above step 2 by pressing rear dial or one of 3/4/2/1. • [Fn BUTTON SET] (P31) or [AF MODE] (P71) cannot be set with 4/2. Make the setting with the Quick Menu (P30). Note • During Motion Picture Recording, settings for My Colour Mode are used. • My Colour settings are memorised even if the camera is turned off. • Auto Bracket cannot be used in My Colour Mode. • ISO sensitivity will be fixed to [AUTO]. • [I.EXPOSURE], [COLOR SPACE] can be set only when the My Colour Mode is set to [CUSTOM]. • The following items cannot be set in My Colour Mode because the camera automatically adjusts them to the optimal setting. – [FILM MODE]/[FLASH]/[FLASH SYNCHRO]/[ISO LIMIT SET] Adjusting the custom settings to achieve desired effects By selecting [CUSTOM], you can take pictures with colour, brightness and saturation adjusted to desired levels. In step 2 on page 94, select [CUSTOM] and press [MENU/SET] Press 3/4 to select an item and 2/1 to adjust. • You can also use the rear dial to set. Item Adjustment contents [COLOR] This will adjust the colour of the image from red light to blue light. (11 steps in n5) [BRIGHTNESS] This will adjust the brightness of the image. (11 steps in n5) [SATURATION] This will adjust the colour intensity of the image from black and white to vivid colour. (11 steps in n5) [RESET] Return all settings to default • Description of adjustment is displayed by pressing [DISPLAY]. (It will return to selection screen when it is pressed again.) VQT2G62 95 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 96 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Press [MENU/SET] to set. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to set. • Recording screen is displayed. ∫ Return [CUSTOM] settings to default 1 Select [RESET] in above step 2. 2 Press 2 to select [YES] and press [MENU/SET]. • Adjusted value for each item returns to standard (centre point). Note • Adjustments made with [CUSTOM] are not in effect in other recording modes. • Icons for the adjusted items are displayed in the LCD monitor/optional external viewfinder when the [CUSTOM] are adjusted. Displayed icon is the one for direction of adjustment. • AF tracking may not function if you adjust [SATURATION] to make the colour lighter. [REC] mode: Registering Personal Menu Settings (Registering custom settings) It is possible to register up to 4 sets of current camera settings as custom sets. • Set to the mode dial to the desired mode and select the desired menu settings in advance. Select [CUST. SET MEM.] in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu. (P28) Press 3/4 to select the custom set to register and then press [MENU/SET]. • The custom settings registered in [ ] can be used with the [ ] of the mode dial. It will be convenient if the custom setting used often is registered, since it can be used by just setting the mode dial. • The custom settings registered in [ ], [ ], or [ ] can be selected in the [ ] of the mode dial. Up to 3 custom settings can be registered, so select the one matching the needs. Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET]. • When [YES] is selected, the settings that were previously stored are overwritten. • You cannot save the following menu items because they affect other recording modes. – [CLOCK SET], [TRAVEL DATE], [NO.RESET], [RESET], [LANGUAGE] and [SCENE MENU] – [BABY1]/[BABY2] or [PET] birthday and name settings in Scene Mode – Data registered with [FACE RECOG.] Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu. 96 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 97 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [REC] mode: Taking pictures in Custom mode You can select one of your own custom settings saved with [CUST. SET MEM.] to suit the picture-taking conditions. Initial setting of the Programme AE mode is registered as the custom settings initially. Set the mode dial to [ ] or [ ]. A Display custom settings. • When set to [ ]. >You can take pictures with the custom settings registered in the [ ]. ([ ] is displayed on the screen) • When set to [ ]. >To steps 2, 3 and 4. A Press [MENU/SET] to display the menu. Press 3/4 to select the custom settings you want to use. • In [ ], press 1 to display the settings for each menu item. (Press 2 to return to the selection screen.) • Only the main menu items are displayed. Press [MENU/SET] to enter the settings. A Saving of the selected custom settings is displayed on the screen. ∫ When changing the menu settings Even if the menu settings are changed temporarily with [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] selected, what has been registered will remain unchanged. To change what has been registered, overwrite the registered data using [CUST. SET MEM.] (P96) on the [CUSTOM MENU] menu. Note • You cannot register the settings of the following menu items as a custom mode. If they are changed, other recording modes will also be affected. – [CLOCK SET], [TRAVEL DATE], [NO.RESET], [RESET], [LANGUAGE] and [SCENE MENU] – [BABY1]/[BABY2] or [PET] birthday and name settings in Scene Mode – Data registered with [FACE RECOG.] VQT2G62 97 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 98 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [REC] mode: Advanced (Recording pictures) Recording Motion Picture You can record motion pictures in high-definition format compliant with the AVCHD standard or in Motion JPEG format. Sound is recorded in mono. The functions available when recording motion pictures differ according to the lens you are using, and the operational sound of the zoom may be recorded Refer to page 15 for details. Select the mode. A Mode dial B Motion picture button ∫ Modes that can be recorded for motion picture Item Settings/Note ñ Intelligent Auto mode The camera will set the most appropriate settings to match the subject and the recording conditions, so you can leave the settings to the camera and take motion pictures easily. ³/±/´/² mode Record motion pictures by automatically setting aperture and shutter speed. Motion Picture P mode (P104) You can record motion pictures with changed Exposure Compensation and aperture settings. , Record motion pictures with selected custom mode settings. Custom mode Record motion pictures that match the scene being recorded. (P89 to 94) ¿ Scene mode My Colour mode Record motion pictures in My Colour Mode setting. Set the focus mode. Focusing changes depending on the focus mode setting and the [CONTINUOUS AF] setting (P103) in the [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu. Focus mode [CONTINUOUS AF] Settings ON You can have the camera focus continuously. Alternatively, you can have the camera focus when you press the shutter button halfway. OFF You can have the camera focus when the shutter button is pressed halfway. AFS/AFC MF 98 VQT2G62 ON OFF You can focus manually. DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 99 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) • The 20 mm/F1.7 interchangeable lens included in the DMC-GF1C utilises a lens drive system to realise a compact and bright F1.7 lens. As a result, sound and vibration may occur during focus operation, but this is not a malfunction. • Operating sounds will be recorded when Auto Focus is performed during Motion Picture Recording. It is recommended to record with [CONTINUOUS AF] (P103) set to [OFF], if the sound of operation bothers you to avoid recording the lens noise. • The 20 mm/F1.7 interchangeable lens included in the DMC-GF1C cannot be set to [AFC]. Start recording by pressing the motion picture button. A Elapsed recording time B Available recording time • The audio is also recorded simultaneously from the built-in microphone on this unit. (Motion pictures cannot be recorded without audio.) A C B • The recording state indicator (red) C will flash while recording motion pictures. • Press the shutter button halfway when it is difficult to focus on the subject. • You can also switch to Manual Focus by pressing [AF/MF] and selecting [MF] (P74). Stop the recording by pressing the motion picture button again. • Sound will go off when pressing the motion picture button indicating start/stop of motion picture recording. Sound volume can be set in [BEEP] (P33). • If the card becomes full in the middle of recording, the camera stops recording automatically. Note • The flash setting is fixed to [Œ]. • Available recording time is displayed when the [REMAINING DISP.] (P130) in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu is set to [REMAINING TIME]. • Refer to P191 for information about the available recording time. • The available recording time displayed on the screen may not decrease regularly. • Depending on the type of the card, the card access indication may appear for a while after recording motion pictures. This is not a malfunction. • The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is operated during the recording of a motion picture. • Audio will not be recorded for 0.5 seconds after it starts recording if it is kept pressed. Release the motion picture button right after you press it. • The screen may be blacked out momentarily, or the unit may record noise due to static electricity or electromagnetic waves etc. depending on the environment of the motion picture recording. • When operating the zoom when recording motion pictures, it may take time to come into focus. • If The Extra Optical Zoom was used before pressing the motion picture button, those settings will be cleared, so the focus range will change dramatically. • When the aspect ratio setting is different in still and motion pictures, the angle of view changes at the start of motion picture recording. When [ REC AREA] (P130) is set to [ ], angle of view during motion picture recording is displayed. • The ISO sensitivity will be set to [AUTO] when recording motion pictures. • When recording motion pictures, [STABILIZER] (Only available when a lens that supports the Stabilizer function is attached) is fixed to [MODE1]. • When recording motion pictures, the following functions cannot be used. –[ ] and [ ] in [AF MODE] – Direction Detection Function VQT2G62 99 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 100 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) – [FACE RECOG.]/[EX. OPT. ZOOM]/[ISO LIMIT SET]/[DIRECT AF AREA] • It is recommended to use a fully charged battery or AC adaptor (P167) when recording motion pictures. • If while recording motion pictures using the AC adaptor (P167) the power supply is cut off due to a power cut or if the AC adaptor is disconnected etc., the motion picture being recorded will not be recorded. • Colour or brightness of the screen may change or horizontal streaks may appear on the screen when the picture is taken under extremely bright light, or under fluorescent lamps, mercury lamps, or sodium lamps etc. When set to Intelligent Auto Mode • When Intelligent Auto Mode is selected in step 1, motion picture recording matching to the subject or recording situation can be performed. ∫ Scene detection When the camera identifies the optimum scene, the icon of the scene concerned is displayed in blue for 2 seconds, after which its colour changes to the usual red. ¦ > [i-PORTRAIT] [i-SCENERY] [i-LOW LIGHT] [i-MACRO] • [¦] is set if none of the scenes are applicable, and the standard settings are set. • When [ ] is selected, the camera automatically detects a person’s face, and it will adjust the focus and exposure. (Face Detection) (P72) Note • Refer to P43 for settings in Intelligent Auto Mode. • Due to conditions such as the ones below, a different scene may be identified for the same subject. – Subject conditions: When the face is bright or dark, The size of the subject, The distance to the subject, The contrast of the subject, When the subject is moving – Recording conditions: Sunset, Sunrise, Under low brightness conditions, When the camera is shaken, When zoom is used • To take pictures in an intended scene, it is recommended that you take pictures in the appropriate recording mode. • Functions enabled for motion picture recording are different to those enabled for still picture recording. Changing [REC MODE] and [REC QUALITY] Select [REC MODE] from the [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu, and press 1. (P28) 100 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 101 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET]. Recording format Effect [AVCHD Lite] Select this format to record HD (high definition) video for playback on your HDTV using an HDMI connection. [MOTION JPEG] Select this format to record standard definition video for playback on your PC. It can be recorded using less storage when there is not much space left on the memory card or when you want to attach the motion picture to an e-mail. Press 3/4 to select [REC QUALITY] and then press 1. Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET]. When [AVCHD Lite] is selected in step 2 Item High quality Longer time Quality (bit rate)¢1 ([SH]) 1280k720 pixels 17 Mbps¢2 ([H]) 1280k720 pixels 13 Mbps¢2 ([L]) 1280k720 pixels 9 Mbps¢2 fps Aspect ratio 50p (Sensor output is 25 fps) 16:9 ¢1 What is bit rate This is the volume of data for definite period of time, and the quality becomes higher when the number gets bigger. This unit is using the “VBR” recording method. “VBR” is an abbreviation of “Variable Bit Rate”, and the bit rate (volume of data for definite period of time) is changed automatically depending on the subject to record. Therefore, the recording time is shortened when a subject with fast movement is recorded. ¢2 What is Mbps This is an abbreviation of “Megabit Per Second”, and it represents the speed of transmission. VQT2G62 101 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 102 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) When [MOTION JPEG] is selected in step 2 Item High quality Longer time Picture size ([HD]) 1280k720 pixels ¢3([WVGA]) 848k480 pixels ([VGA]) 640k480 pixels ([QVGA]) 320k240 pixels fps Aspect ratio 16:9 30 4:3 ¢3 This item cannot be set in the Intelligent Auto Mode. • With the [AVCHD Lite] or [ ] for [MOTION JPEG], high quality motion picture can be enjoyed on the TV by using the HDMI mini cable (optional). For details, see “Playing back on the TV with HDMI socket” on P150. Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu. Note • It is recommended to use a card with SD Speed Class¢1 with “Class 6” or higher when recording motion pictures. ¢1 The SD Speed Class Rating is the speed standard for successive writes. • When you set the picture quality to [ ], [ ] or [ ], we recommend using a high-speed card with “10MB/s” or greater displayed on the package. • The motion picture recording may stop in the middle when any of the following cards are used. – Cards on which recording and deleting have been repeated many times – Cards which have been formatted using a PC or other equipment Before taking pictures, format (P36) the card in the unit. Because formatting will delete all data recorded on the card, save important data beforehand on the computer. • Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD Lite] or [MOTION JPEG] may be played back with poor picture or sound quality or playback may not be possible even when played back with equipment compatible with these formats. Also, the recording information may not be displayed properly. In this case, use this unit. For details on AVCHD compatible devices, refer to the support sites below. http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/ (This Site is English only.) • Motion picture recorded in [AVCHD Lite] cannot be played back on the equipment that is not compatible to the AVCHD (conventional DVD recorder, etc.), so read the instruction manual for the equipment in use for the action. • Motion picture recorded in [AVCHD Lite] does not comply with the “DCF/Exif”, so some information will not display while playback. • Sound from motion pictures (When [REC MODE] is set to [MOTION JPEG]) or pictures with audio recorded by this camera cannot be played back by older models of Panasonic digital cameras (LUMIX) launched before July 2008. 102 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 103 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [CONTINUOUS AF] You can set the camera to always maintain the focus or fix the focus. Select [CONTINUOUS AF] from the [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu, and press 1. (P28) Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET]. Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu. • Set to [OFF] when you would like to fix the focus. Note • It is recommended to set the Auto Focus to [OFF] if the sound of operation bothers you. [WIND CUT] Wind noise can be reduced efficiently. Use this when the wind noise is bothersome. Select [WIND CUT] from the [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu, and press 1. (P28) Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET]. Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu. Note • Sound quality will be different than usual when [WIND CUT] is set. • [WIND CUT] does not function with still pictures with audio or when audio dubbing. VQT2G62 103 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 104 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [REC] mode: Recording motion pictures with the desired settings ( : Motion Picture P mode) You can set the degree of peripheral defocus created by the exposure compensation or the aperture setting and record motion pictures. Set the mode dial to [ ]. Set the Focus Mode (P98) Press the rear dial to change the settings screen. STD AFS STD STD −3 0 +3 AUTO AWB R1m40s AFS −3 0 +3 AFS AUTO AWB R1m40s −3 −3 0 +3 AUTO AWB R1m40s A the exposure compensation B the degree of peripheral defocus • With each press of the rear dial, the camera switches between Exposure Compensation and the degree of peripheral defocus setting operations. • The degree of peripheral defocus guide disappears after approximately 4 seconds if no operation is performed. Rotate the rear dial to change the settings. Press the motion picture button to start the recording. Stop the recording by pressing the motion picture button again. STD AFS −3 −3 0 +3 AUTO AWB R1m40s • If the card becomes full in the middle of recording, the camera stops recording automatically. • You can also start/stop motion picture recording by pressing the shutter button. • Sound will go off when pressing the motion picture button or shutter button indicating motion picture recording start/stop. Sound volume can be set in [BEEP] (P33). ∫ About the flicker reduction function The flicker reduction function can be switched [ON]/[OFF] by pressing the [‚]. • If there is marked flicker or striping when recording motion pictures under fluorescent lighting in regions with a 60 Hz mains supply, set the Flicker Reduction Function to [ON]. The Flicker Reduction Function will activate, automatically adjusting the shutter speed to 1/120. Note that you cannot use PERIPHERAL DEFOCUS with the Flicker Reduction Function. 104 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 105 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Note • The [AF MODE] is automatically set to [Ø] when you switch the recording mode to Motion Picture P Mode while the [AF MODE] is set to [ ]. • ISO sensitivity will be fixed to [AUTO]. •[ REC AREA] (P130) is fixed to [ ]. • [REMAINING DISP.] (P130) is fixed to [REMAINING TIME]. • As the aperture is controlled within a certain range to get an adequate exposure in this mode, for some cases depending on the brightness of the subject, an actual aperture setting would not be changed in response to the movement of selection cursor, so that no change on the degree of peripheral defocus could be recognised. (For example, in dark places including in a room, the aperture would stay at the maximum aperture value, even for both ends of the selection cursor, so that no change on the degree of peripheral defocus could be recognised.) • Refer to “Recording Motion Picture” on P98 for other settings, operations and information for recording motion pictures. VQT2G62 105 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 106 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [REC] mode: Taking a picture with Face Recognition function Face Recognition is a function which finds a face resembling a registered face and prioritises focus and exposure automatically. Even if the person is located towards the back or on the end of a line in a group photo, the camera can still take a clear picture. To use the Face Recognition function, set the [FACE RECOG.] in the [REC] Mode menu to [ON], and register the face images of the people to recognise. (initially set to [OFF]) • The Face Recognition function includes the following. In Recording Mode – Display of corresponding name when camera detects a registered face¢ (if name has been set for the registered face) – The camera will remember a face that has been photograhed many times and display the registration screen automatically (if [AUTO REGISTRATION] is set to [ON]) In Playback Mode – Display of name and age (if information has been registered) – Selective playback of pictures chosen from pictures registered with Face Recognition ([CATEGORY PLAY] (P136)) ¢ Names of up to 3 people are displayed. Precedence for the names displayed when taking pictures is determined according to the order of registration. Note • [FACE RECOG.] only works when [AF MODE] is set to [š]. • During the burst mode, [FACE RECOG.] picture information can be attached to only the first picture. • After pressing the shutter halfway down, a different person’s picture information may be added when the camera is turned to a different subject to photograph. • You cannot use [FACE RECOG.] in the following scene modes. – [PERIPHERAL DEFOCUS]/[FOOD]/[NIGHT SCENERY]/[ILLUMINATIONS] • When the focus mode is set to [MF], automatic registration is not available. • The data registered with [FACE RECOG.] will be reset when the [REC] menu settings are reset with [RESET]. • [FACE RECOG.] will find a face similar to the registered face, and does not guarantee secure recognition of a person. • Face Recognition may take more time to select and recognise distinctive facial features than regular face detection. • Even when face recognition information has been registered, pictures taken with [NAME] set to [OFF] will not be categorized by face recognition in [CATEGORY PLAY]. • Even when face recognition information is changed (P109), face recognition information for the pictures already taken will not be changed. For instance, if the name is changed, pictures recorded before the change will not be categorized by face recognition in [CATEGORY PLAY]. • To change the name information of the pictures taken, perform the [REPLACE] in [FACE REC EDIT] (P148). 106 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 107 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Face Settings You can register information such as names and birthdays for face images of up to 6 people. Registration can be facilitated by taking multiple face images of each person. (up to 3 pictures/registration) ∫ Point of recording when registering the face images • Face front with eyes open and mouth closed, making sure the outline of the face, the eyes, or the eyebrows are not covered with the hair when registering. • Make sure there is no extreme shading on the face when registering. (Flash will not flash during registration.) [Good example for registering] ∫ When it is not recognising during recording • Register the face of same person indoors and outdoors, or with different expressions or angles. (P109) • Additionally register at the location of recording. • Changing the [SENSITIVITY] setting (P111) • When a person who is registered is not recognised, correct by re-registering. Example of faces that are hard to recognise Face Recognition may not be possible or may not recognise faces correctly even for registered faces in the following instances, depending on the facial expression and environment. • Hair is covering the eyes or the eyebrows (A) • The face is dark/the light is at an angle (B) • The face is facing in angle or sideways • The face is facing upward/downward • The eyes are closed • When the face is extremely bright or dark • Hidden by sunglasses, glasses reflecting light, hair, hat, etc. • When the face appears small on the screen • The entire face is not in the screen • When distinctive facial features have changed with age • When parents and children or siblings closely resemble one another • Facial expression is very different • When there is little contrast on the faces • When there is rapid movement • When the camera is shaking • When digital zoom is used A B VQT2G62 107 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 108 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Registering face image of new person Select [FACE RECOG.] on the [REC] Mode menu and then press 1. (P28) Press 3/4 to select [MEMORY] and then press [MENU/SET]. • If 6 people have already been registered, the list of registered people will appear. Press 3/4/2/1 to select the person to be replaced and press [MENU/SET]. Information of the person that was replaced will be deleted. Take the picture adjusting the face with the guide. • The faces of subjects other than people (pets, etc.) cannot be registered. • When recognition fails, a message will appear and the display will return to the recording screen. In this case, try taking the picture again. Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET]. Select item to edit with 3/4, and then press 1. • You can register up to 3 face images. To register further pictures, press 2 to select the face image and press [MENU/SET]. Then press 3/4 to select [ADDITIONAL IMAGE], press [MENU/SET] and return to step 3. Item [NAME] Description of settings It is possible to register names. 1 Press 4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET]. 2 Enter the name. • For details on how to enter characters, read the [TITLE EDIT] section on P138. [PRIORITY] The focus and exposure are preferentially adjusted for higher-priority faces. Press 3/4/2/1 to select the priority and then press [MENU/SET]. [AGE] It is possible to register the birthday. 1 Press 4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET]. 2 Press 2/1 to select the items (Year/Month/Day), and then press 3/4 to set and then press [MENU/SET]. Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. ∫ About the information • When [DISPLAY] is pressed on the recording screen described in step 3, an explanation appears for taking face images. (Press again to return to the recording screen.) 108 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 109 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Change the information for a registered person You can add a picture to the information of the registered people, replace or delete the pictures which have already been registered, and information such as names and register priority. 1 2 3 4 5 Select [FACE RECOG.] from the [REC] Mode menu, and then press 1. (P28) Press 4 to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET]. Press 3 to select [EDIT] and then press [MENU/SET]. Press 3/4/2/1 to select the person to edit and then press [MENU/SET]. • To change [NAME], [PRIORITY] or [AGE] information, go to step 5 of “Registering face image of new person”. Press 2 to select the image of person, and then press [MENU/SET]. ∫ To add or replace a face image 6 Press 3 to select [ADDITIONAL IMAGE], and then press [MENU/SET]. 7 8 9 • To add a face image, go to step 9. Press 2/1 to select the face image to replace, and then press [MENU/SET]. Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET]. Perform the operation in step 3 and following in “Registering face image of new person”. ∫ To delete a face image 6 7 8 9 Press 4 to select [DELETE], and then press [MENU/SET]. • When only one picture has been registered, you cannot select [DELETE]. Press 2/1 to select the face image to delete, and then press [MENU/SET]. Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET]. Perform the operation in step 5 and following in “Registering face image of new person”. Deleting the information for a registered person Deleting information of a registered person. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Select [FACE RECOG.] from the [REC] Mode menu, and then press 1. (P28) Press 4 to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET]. Press 3/4 to select [DELETE] and press [MENU/SET]. Press 3/4/2/1 to select the image of the person to delete and then press [MENU/SET]. Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET]. Press [‚] to return to the menu screen. • Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu. VQT2G62 109 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 110 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Auto Registration When [AUTO REGISTRATION] is set to [ON] in step 3 of “Change the information for a registered person” (P109) while [FACE RECOG.] in the [REC] Mode menu is set to [ON], the registration screen will display automatically after taking a picture of a face that has a high number of appearances. • Registration screen is displayed after approximately 3 pictures. (It is not counted when Burst Mode, Auto Bracket, White Balance Bracket, Multi Film Bracket or [AUDIO REC.] is set.) • It may be extremely hard to recognise only with [AUTO REGISTRATION], so register the face images with [FACE RECOG.] in the [REC] Mode menu beforehand. ∫ Registering from the automatic registration screen 1 Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET]. 2 • If there are no registered persons, proceed to step 3. • Selection screen is displayed again when [NO] is selected, and when [YES] is selected with 3, [AUTO REGISTRATION] will be set to [OFF]. Press 3/4 to select [NEW PERSON] or [ADDITIONAL IMAGE] and then press [MENU/SET]. Item [NEW PERSON] [ADDITIONAL IMAGE] 3 Description of settings • A list of registered people is displayed when there are 6 people already registered. Select the person to be replaced. To additionally register a face image for a registered person. Press 3/4/2/1 to select the person to whom you wish add the picture, and then press [MENU/SET]. • If 3 images have already been registered, the picture replacement screen will appear. In this case, select the picture you wish to replace. • After additionally registering or changing a face image, the screen returns automatically to the recording screen. Perform the operation in Step 5 and following in “Registering face image of new person”. Note • If the registration screen will not display, it may display easier by recording in the same conditions or with the same expressions. • If a face is not recognised even though it is registered, it will make the recognition easier by registering the person again using the [FACE RECOG.] in the [REC] Mode menu in that environment. • If the registration screen is displayed for the person that is already registered, it will make the recognition easier by additionally registering. • It may make recognition harder when a picture recorded with flash is registered. 110 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 111 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Sensitivity Changing the sensitivity of Face Recognition. 1 2 3 4 Select [FACE RECOG.] from the [REC] Mode menu, and then press 1. (P28) Press 4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET]. Press 4 to select [SENSITIVITY] and then press [MENU/SET]. Press 3/4 to select [HIGH] or [LOW] and then press [MENU/SET]. Item 5 Description of settings [HIGH] Set when recognition is difficult. The likelihood of recognition increases, but so does the likelihood of mistaken recognition. [LOW] Set when the frequency of mistaken recognition is high. • To return to the original settings, select [NORMAL]. Press [‚] to close the menu. • Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu. VQT2G62 111 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 112 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [REC] mode: Useful Functions at Travel Destinations Recording which Day of the Vacation You Take the Picture For details on the [SETUP] menu settings, refer to P28. If you set the departure date or the travel destination of the vacation in advance, the number of days that have passed since the departure date (which day of the vacation it is) is recorded when you take the picture. You can display the number of days that have passed when playing back the pictures and stamp it on the recorded pictures with [TEXT STAMP] (P139). • The number of days that have passed since the departure date can be printed out using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO 4.0 HD Edition” bundled software on the CD-ROM (supplied). • Select [CLOCK SET] to set the current date and time in advance. (P26) Select [TRAVEL DATE] from the [SETUP] menu, and then press 1. Press 3 to select [TRAVEL SETUP] and then press 1. Press 4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET]. Press 3/4/2/1 to set the departure date (year/month/day), and then press [MENU/SET]. Press 3/4/2/1 to set the return date (year/ month/day), and then press [MENU/SET]. • If you do not want to set the return date, press [MENU/SET] while the date bar is displayed. 112 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 113 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Press 4 to select [LOCATION] and then press 1. Press 4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET]. Enter the location. • For details on how to enter characters, read the [TITLE EDIT] section on P138. Press [MENU/SET] twice to close the menu. Take a picture. • The number of days that have passed since the departure date is displayed for about 5 seconds if this unit is turned on etc. after setting the travel date or when the travel date is set. • When the travel date is set, [—] appears on the lower right of the screen. ∫ Cancelling the travel date The travel date is automatically cancelled if the current date is after the return date. If you want to cancel the travel date before the end of the vacation, select [OFF] on the screen shown in step 3 or 7 and then press [MENU/SET] twice. If the [TRAVEL SETUP] is set to [OFF] in step 3, [LOCATION] will be also set to [OFF]. Note • The travel date is calculated using the date in the clock setting and the departure date you set. If you set [WORLD TIME] (P114) to the travel destination, the travel date is calculated using the date in the clock setting and the travel destination setting. • The travel date setting is memorised even if the camera is turned off. • If [TRAVEL DATE] is set to [OFF], the number of days that have passed since the departure date will not be recorded. Even if [TRAVEL DATE] is set to [SET] after taking the pictures, which day of the vacation you took them is not displayed. • If you set a departure date and then take a picture on a date before this departure date, [-] (minus) is displayed in orange and the day of the vacation that you took the picture is not recorded. • If the travel date is displayed as [-] (minus) in white, there is a time difference that involves date change between the [HOME] and [DESTINATION]. (It will be recorded) • The text set as [LOCATION] can be edited later with [TITLE EDIT]. • The name for [BABY1]/[BABY2] and [PET] in Scene Mode will not be recorded when [LOCATION] is set. • [TRAVEL DATE] cannot be set for motion pictures recorded with [AVCHD Lite]. • [LOCATION] cannot be recorded when taking motion pictures. • [TRAVEL DATE] cannot be set in the Intelligent Auto Mode. Setting of other recording mode will be reflected. VQT2G62 113 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 114 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Recording Dates/Times at Overseas Travel Destinations (World Time) For details on the [SETUP] menu settings, refer to P28. You can display the local times at the travel destinations and record them on the pictures you take. • Select [CLOCK SET] to set the current date and time in advance. (P26) Select [WORLD TIME] from the [SETUP] menu, and then press 1. • When first using the camera after purchasing it, the [PLEASE SET THE HOME AREA] message appears. Press [MENU/SET], and set the home area on the screen in step 3. Press 4 to select [HOME], and then press [MENU/SET]. Press 2/1 to select the home area, and then press [MENU/SET]. A A Current time B Time difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) B • If daylight saving time [ ] is used at the home area, press 3. Press 3 again to return to the original time. • The daylight saving time setting for the home area does not advance the current time. Advance the clock setting by one hour. Press 3 to select [DESTINATION] and then press [MENU/SET] to set. C Depending on the setting, the time at the travel destination C area or the home area is displayed. D Press 2/1 to select the area the travel destination is in and then press [MENU/SET] to set. D Current time of the destination area E Time difference • If daylight saving time [ ] is used at the travel destination, press 3. (The time advances by one hour.) Press 3 again to return to the original time. Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. 114 VQT2G62 E DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 115 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Note • Return the setting to [HOME] when the vacation is finished by performing steps 1, 2 and 3. • If [HOME] is already set, change only the travel destination, and use. • If you cannot find the travel destination in the areas displayed on the screen, set by the time difference from the home area. Using the [REC] Mode Menu • [METERING MODE], [I.EXPOSURE], and [DIGITAL ZOOM] are common to both the [REC] mode menu and [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu. Changing these settings in one of these menus is reflected in other menu. [FILM MODE] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. You can select colour characteristics for your pictures from among 9 sets, much as you would select a film for a film camera. Select the Film Mode setting according to the conditions and the nature of the recording. Applicable modes: [You can only select [STANDARD] and [STANDARD] ( Item ) in [ ], [¿] mode.] Effect [STANDARD] (COLOUR) This is the standard setting. [DYNAMIC] (COLOUR) The saturation and contrast of the stored colours are increased. [NATURE] (COLOUR) Brighter red, green and blue. Enhanced beauty of nature. [SMOOTH] (COLOUR) The contrast is lowered for smoother and clearer colour. [NOSTALGIC] (COLOUR) Lower saturation and contrast. Reflecting passage of time. [VIBRANT] (COLOUR) Higher saturation and contrast than dynamic. [STANDARD] ( This is the standard setting. ) [DYNAMIC] ( ) The contrast is increased. [SMOOTH] ( ) Smooths the picture without losing the skin texture. [MY FILM 1]/[MY FILM 2] The saved setting is used. [MULTI FILM] It will take pictures changing the type of film in accordance with the setting every time the shutter button is pressed. (Up to 3 pictures) Note • Refer to P82 for details. VQT2G62 115 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 116 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) ? [ASPECT RATIO] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. This allows you to select the aspect ratio of the pictures to suit printing or the playback method. Applicable modes: [X]: [ASPECT RATIO] of a 4:3 TV [Y]: [ASPECT RATIO] of a 35 mm film camera [W]: [ASPECT RATIO] of a high-definition TV, etc. [ ]: Square aspect ratio [X] [Y] [W] [ ] Note • The ends of the recorded pictures may be cut at printing so check before printing. (P185) 116 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 117 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) @ [PICTURE SIZE] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. Set the number of pixels. The higher the numbers of pixels, the finer the detail of the pictures will appear even when they are printed onto large sheets. Applicable modes: ∫ When the aspect ratio is [X]. 4000k3000 pixels (12 million pixels) 2816k2112 pixels (5.9 million pixels) 2048k1536 pixels (3.1 million pixels) ∫ When the aspect ratio is [Y]. 4000k2672 pixels (10.7 million pixels) 2816k1880 pixels (5.3 million pixels) 2048k1360 pixels (2.8 million pixels) ∫ When the aspect ratio is [W]. 4000k2248 pixels (9.0 million pixels) 2816k1584 pixels (4.5 million pixels) 1920k1080 pixels (2.1 million pixels) ∫ When the aspect ratio is [ ]. 2992k2992 pixels (9.0 million pixels) 2112k2112 pixels (4.5 million pixels) 1504k1504 pixels (2.3 million pixels) Note • If you set [EX. OPT. ZOOM] (P122) to [ON], [ ] is displayed on the screen when the picture size is set to a size other than the maximum picture size for each aspect ratio. “EZ” is an abbreviation of “Extra optical Zoom”. • A digital picture is made of numerous dots called pixels. The higher the numbers of pixels, the finer the picture will be when it is printed on a large piece of paper or displayed on a PC monitor. A Many pixels (Fine) B Few pixels (Rough) ¢ These pictures are examples to show the effect. • If you change the aspect ratio, set the picture size again. • Refer to P187 for information about the number of recordable pictures. VQT2G62 117 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 118 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) A [QUALITY] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. Set the compression rate at which the pictures are to be stored. Applicable modes: [A]: Fine (when giving priority to the picture quality) [›]: Standard (when using the standard picture quality and increasing the number of pictures to be recorded without changing the number of pixels) [ ]: RAWiFine (In addition to the [RAW] settings, a fine-equivalent JPEG image is simultaneously created.)¢1 [ ]: RAWiStandard (In addition to the [RAW] settings, a standard-equivalent JPEG image is simultaneously created.)¢1 [ ]: RAW file (When the image is to be edited with a PC in high quality)¢2 ¢1 If you delete a RAW file from the camera, the corresponding JPEG image will also be deleted. ¢2 It is fixed to maximum recordable pixels ([L]) for each image aspect ratio. Note • Refer to P187 for information about the number of recordable pictures. • You can enjoy more advanced picture editing if you use RAW files. You can save RAW files in a file format (JPEG, TIFF etc.) that can be displayed on your PC etc., develop them and edit them using the software “SILKYPIX Developer Studio” by Ichikawa Soft Laboratory on the CD-ROM (supplied). •[ ] images are recorded with a smaller data volume than [ ] or [ ]. • [PRINT SET] and [FAVORITE] cannot be set to a picture taken by [ ]. [FACE RECOG.] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. Specify a person’s face and use the face recognition functions. Applicable modes: [OFF]/[ON]/[MEMORY]/[SET] Note • Refer to P106 for details. [STABILIZER] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. Using one of these modes, jitter during picture taking is detected, and the camera automatically compensates the jitter, enabling jitter-free images to be taken. Check that the [O.I.S.] switch on the lens is set to [ON]¢. Applicable modes: 118 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 119 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [MODE1]: Jitter is always compensated during [REC] mode. [MODE2]: The jitter is compensated for when the shutter button is pressed. [MODE3]: Camera shake is corrected for up/down movements. This mode is ideal for panning (a method of taking pictures which involves turning the camera to track the movements of a subject which continues to move in a fixed direction). Note ¢A lens which supports the Stabilizer function is required. – The 20 mm/F1.7 interchangeable lens supplied with the DMC-GF1C does not support the stabilizer function. – The 14-45 mm/F3.5-5.6 interchangeable lens supplied with the DMC-GF1K supports the stabilizer function. • [STABILIZER] cannot be selected when a lens without Stabilizer function is used. • The stabilizer function may not be effective in the following cases. – When there is a lot of jitter. – When the zoom magnification is high. – When using the digital zoom. – When taking pictures while following a moving subject. – When the shutter speed becomes slower to take pictures indoors or in dark places. • Be careful of camera jitter when you press the shutter button. • The panning effect in [MODE3] is more difficult to achieve in the following cases. – In brightly lit places such as in broad daylight on a summer’s day – When the shutter speed is faster than 1/100th of a second. – When you move the camera too slowly because the subject is moving slowly. (The background will not become a blur.) – When the camera does not keep up with the subject satisfactorily • We recommend taking pictures with the Optional External Viewfinder (P162) when panning in [MODE3]. • The setting is fixed to [MODE1] in recording motion pictures. [FLASH] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. You can switch the flash setting. Applicable modes: [‡]/[ ]/[‰]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] Note • Refer to P60 for details. [RED-EYE REMOVAL] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. When the flash is used with the Red-Eye Reduction ([ ], [ ], [ will automatically detect and correct the red-eye in the image data. ]) selected, it Applicable modes: [OFF]/[ON] Note • It may not be able to correct the red-eye depending on the recording conditions. • When the Digital Red-Eye correction is set to [ON], [ ] appears on the flash icon. • Refer to P61 for details. VQT2G62 119 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 120 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [FLASH SYNCHRO] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. You can set to the 2nd curtain synchro. Applicable modes: [1ST]/[2ND] Note • Refer to P64 for details. [FLASH ADJUST.] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. You can adjust the flash output. Applicable modes: [s2 EV]/[s1 2/3 EV]/[s1 1/3 EV]/[s1 EV]/[s2/3 EV]/[s1/3 EV]/[0 EV]/[r1/3 EV]/ [r2/3 EV]/[r1 EV]/[r1 1/3 EV]/[r1 2/3 EV]/[r2 EV] Note • Refer to P63 for details. C [METERING MODE] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed. Applicable modes: [C]: Multiple This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically. Usually, we recommend using this method. [ ]: Centre weighted This is the method used to focus on the subject on the centre of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly. [Ù]: Spot This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target A. Note • When the AF mode is set to [š] while [C] is selected, exposure is adjusted to the face of a person, and when it is set to [ ], exposure is adjusted to the locked subject. 120 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 121 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [I.EXPOSURE] (Intelligent exposure adjustment) For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. Contrast and exposure will be adjusted automatically when there is a big difference in brightness between the background and subject, to bring the image close to how you see. Applicable modes: [OFF]/[LOW]/[STANDARD]/[HIGH] Note • Even when the [SENSITIVITY] is set to [ISO100]/[ISO125], [SENSITIVITY] may be set higher than [ISO100]/[ISO125] if the picture is taken with [I.EXPOSURE] set to valid. • Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the conditions. •[ ] in the screen turns to yellow when [I.EXPOSURE] is in effect. • [LOW], [STANDARD], or [HIGH] represents the maximum range of effect. [LONG SHTR NR] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. The camera automatically removes noise that appears when the shutter speed becomes slower to take pictures of night scenery etc. so you can take beautiful pictures. Applicable modes: [OFF]/[ON] Note • If you set [ON], the countdown screen is displayed when the shutter button is pressed. Do not move the camera at this time. After the countdown is finished, [PLEASE WAIT...] is displayed for the same time as the selected shutter speed for signal processing. • We recommend using a tripod when the shutter speed is slowed to take pictures. • This does not operate during motion picture recording. [ISO LIMIT SET] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. It will select optimal ISO sensitivity with set value as limit depending on the brightness of the subject. Applicable modes: [OFF]/[200]/[400]/[800]/[1600] Note • The upper limit of the ISO sensitivity can be set. • The higher the value set for the ISO sensitivity, the more the jitter is reduced but the greater the amount of picture noise. • It will work when the [SENSITIVITY] is set to [AUTO] or [ ]. VQT2G62 121 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 122 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [ISO INCREMENTS] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. ISO sensitivity settings between [ISO100] and [ISO3200] are changed for every 1/3 EV. Applicable modes: [1/3 EV]: [100]/[125]/[160]/[200]/[250]/[320]/[400]/[500]/[640]/[800]/[1000]/[1250]/ [1600]/[2000]/[2500]/[3200] [1 EV]: [100]/[200]/[400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200] Note • When the setting is changed from [1/3 EV] to [1 EV], ISO sensitivity will be set to value closest to the value set during the [1/3 EV]. (Set value will not restore when the setting is changed back to [1/3 EV]. It will stay as the setting selected for [1 EV].) [EX. OPT. ZOOM] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. Enlarging a picture with no picture quality deterioration Applicable modes: [OFF]/[ON] Note • Refer to P49 for details. ) [DIGITAL ZOOM] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. This can enlarge subjects even more than the Optical Zoom or Extra Optical Zoom. Applicable modes: [OFF]/[2t]/[4t] Note • Refer to P49 for details. • If camera shake (jitter) is a problem during zooming, it is recommended that [STABILIZER] (Only available when a lens that supports the Stabilizer function is attached) be set to [MODE1]. [BURST RATE] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. You can set the burst speed. Applicable modes: [H]/[L] Note • Refer to P66 for details. 122 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 123 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [AUTO BRACKET] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. You can set the compensation range of the exposure and the bracket order. Applicable modes: [STEP]: [3•1/3]/[3•2/3]/[5•1/3]/[5•2/3]/[7•1/3]/[7•2/3] [SEQUENCE]: [0/j/i]/[j/0/i] Note • Refer to P68 for details. [SELF-TIMER] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. You can set the time for the self-timer. Applicable modes: [ ]/[ ]/[ ] Note • Refer to P70 for details. [COLOR SPACE] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. Set this when you want to correct the colour reproduction of the recorded pictures on a PC, printer etc. Applicable modes: [sRGB]: Colour space is set to sRGB colour space. This is widely used in computer related equipment. [AdobeRGB]: Colour space is set to AdobeRGB colour space. AdobeRGB is mainly used for business purposes such as professional printing because it has a greater range of reproducible colours than sRGB. Note • Depending on the colour space setting, the file name of the recorded picture changes as shown. P1000001.JPG P: sRGB _: AdobeRGB • Set to sRGB if you are not very familiar with AdobeRGB. • The setting is fixed to [sRGB] when recording motion pictures. VQT2G62 123 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 124 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) B [AUDIO REC.] For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P28. Audio can be recorded simultaneously with the image. You can record the conversation during the shooting or the situation as a memo. Applicable modes: [OFF]: Audio will not be recorded. [ON]: [B] is displayed on the screen. Audio will be recorded as soon as the image is recorded. (It will stop in 5 seconds) • If you press [MENU/SET] during audio recording, the audio recording is cancelled. Note • Audio is recorded from the built-in microphone on the camera. • Audio recorded with this unit may not playback on other equipment. • Sound from motion pictures (When [REC MODE] is set to [MOTION JPEG]) or pictures with audio recorded by this camera cannot be played back by older models of Panasonic digital camera (LUMIX) launched before July 2008. • [AUDIO REC.] cannot be set in the following cases. – When recording with Auto Bracket – During burst shooting – When [SELF-TIMER] is set to [ ] – When recording with White Balance Bracket – When recording with Multi Film Bracket – When [QUALITY] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ] 124 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 125 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Using the [MOTION PICTURE] Mode Menu • [METERING MODE], [I.EXPOSURE], and [DIGITAL ZOOM] are common to both the [REC] mode menu and [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu. Changing these settings in one of these menus is reflected in other menu. – For details, refer to the explanation for the corresponding setting in [REC] mode menu. [REC MODE] For details on [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu settings, refer to P28. This sets up the data format of motion pictures. Applicable modes: [ [AVCHD Lite]]/[ [MOTION JPEG]] Note • Refer to P100 for details. [REC QUALITY] For details on [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu settings, refer to P28. This sets up the picture quality of motion pictures. Applicable modes: ∫ When [REC MODE] is [ [SH]/[H]/[L] [AVCHD Lite]]. ∫ When [REC MODE] is [ [MOTION JPEG]]. [HD]/[WVGA]/[VGA]/[QVGA] Note • Refer to P100 for details. [CONTINUOUS AF] For details on [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu settings, refer to P28. You can set the camera to always maintain the focus or fix the focus. Applicable modes: [OFF]/[ON] Note • Refer to P103 for details. VQT2G62 125 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 126 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [WIND CUT] For details on [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu settings, refer to P28. This reduces the wind noise in the audio recording. Applicable modes: [OFF]/[LOW]/[STANDARD]/[HIGH] Note • Refer to P103 for details. Perform these settings if you need to. Using the [CUSTOM MENU] • In the Intelligent auto mode, only [CUST. SET MEM.], [GUIDE LINE] and [REMAINING DISP.] can be set. For details on how to select the [CUSTOM MENU] menu settings, refer to P28. Up to 4 current camera settings can be registered as custom settings. [CUST. SET MEM.] [ [ [ [ ] ] ] ] • Refer to P96 for details. This will set the display style of the LCD monitor. [LCD DISP.STYLE] [ ]: Viewfinder style [ ]: LCD monitor style • Refer to P56 for details. This allows you to set either to display or not display the histogram. (P59) [HISTOGRAM] [OFF] [ON]: Position of the histogram can be set. Refer to P59 on how to set. This will set the pattern of guide lines displayed when taking a picture. (P58) [GUIDE LINE] 126 VQT2G62 [OFF]/[ ]/[ [ Position of the guide line can be set. Refer to P58 for how to set. ]: ] DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 127 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) Select whether or not to display the exposure meter when the mode dial is switched to ³/±/´/² etc. [OFF] [ON]: [EXPO.METER] • Set to [ON] to display the [EXPO.METER] when correcting exposure, performing programme shift, setting aperture, and setting shutter speed. • Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red. • The exposure meter will only be displayed when the camera is set to display information on the LCD monitor or optional external viewfinder (P56) • The [EXPO.METER] disappears after approximately 4 seconds if no operation is performed. This will set what will be fixed by the [AF/AE LOCK] button when taking a picture with fixed focus or exposure. [AF/AE LOCK] [AE]: Only the exposure is locked. [AF]: Only the focus is locked. [AF/AE]: Both focus and exposure are locked. • Refer to P75 for details. This will set the operation of [AF/AE LOCK] button when taking a picture with fixed focus or exposure. [OFF]: The focus and the exposure are fixed only while you are pressing [AF/AE LOCK]. (P75) If you release [AF/AE LOCK], AF/AE Lock is cancelled. [ON]: The focus and the exposure remain fixed even if you release [AF/AE LOCK] after pressing it. If you press [AF/AE LOCK] again, AF/AE Lock is cancelled. [AF/AE LOCK HOLD] VQT2G62 127 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 128 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) This will set the operation of the [ preview screen. ] button when displaying the [OFF]: Preview screen is displayed only when the [ ] is pressed. It will return to previous screen when [ ] is released. [ON]: Preview screen is displayed even after the [ ] is released after pressing. (P88) It will return to previous screen when [ ] is pressed again. [PREVIEW HOLD] Depending on the setting, camera will adjust the focus automatically before pressing the shutter button halfway. [PRE AF] [OFF] [ ]: Quick AF [ ]: Continuous AF About [ ] and [ ] [ ] will adjust the focus automatically when the jitter of the camera gets small. [ ] will adjust the focus at all times (continuous AF operation). The camera will adjust the focus automatically, and the focus adjustment when the shutter button is pressed becomes faster. It is effective when you do not want to a photo opportunity. Note • The battery will be consumed faster than usual. • Press the shutter button halfway again when it is difficult to focus on the subject. • When [PRE AF] is set to [ ], it may take time to focus on the subject if you rotate the zoom ring from Wide to Tele or suddenly change the subject from a distant one to a nearby one. • [PRE AF] does not work during the Preview Mode. • [PRE AF] does not work with lenses that do not allow auto focus. [ ] does not work with lenses for which the focus mode cannot be set to [AFC]. (P15) Position and size of the AF area can be modified easily during recording. [DIRECT AF AREA] [OFF] [ON]: • Refer to P73 for details. 128 VQT2G62 AF area can be moved freely with 3/4/2/1 when [Ø] is selected. DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 129 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) It will set so no picture can be taken when it is out of focus. [OFF]: This gives priority to the best time to take a picture so you can take a picture when the shutter button is pressed fully. [ON]: You cannot take a picture until the subject is brought into focus. [FOCUS PRIORITY] • If you set [OFF], be careful as the picture may not be properly focused even if [AFS] or [AFC] in Focus Mode is set. • [AFS] or [AFC] will not operate with certain lenses. For details, refer to page 15. • This does not operate during motion picture recording. Illuminating the subject makes it easier for the camera to focus when recording in low light conditions that make focusing difficult. [AF ASSIST LAMP] [OFF]: The AF assist lamp does not turn on. [ON]: When taking pictures in dark places, the AF assist lamp lights while the shutter button is pressed halfway. (Larger AF areas are now displayed.) • The effective range of the AF assist lamp is different depending on used lens. – When 20 mm/F1.7 lens included in DMC-GF1C is attached: Approx. 1.0 m to 3.5 m – When 14 – 45 mm/F3.5– 5.6 lens included in DMC-GF1K is attached and at Wide: Approx. 1.0 m to 3.0 m • When you do not want to use the AF assist lamp (e.g. when taking pictures of animals in dark places), set the [AF ASSIST LAMP] to [OFF]. In this case, it will become more difficult to focus on the subject. • Remove the lens hood. • When you use a lens with a large filter diameter that obscures the AF assist lamp, shadows may appear on the picture and the performance of the camera may deteriorate. • The setting for the [AF ASSIST LAMP] is fixed to [OFF] in [SCENERY], [ARCHITECTURE], [NIGHT SCENERY] and [SUNSET] in Scene Mode. It is possible to adjust focus manually after it was adjusted automatically. [OFF] [AF+MF] [ON]: It is possible to finely adjust the focus manually by rotating the focus ring while AF lock (Focus Mode is set to [AFS] and shutter button is half-way pressed, or AF lock with [AF/AE LOCK]). In Manual Focus, the assistance screen appears on the screen to facilitate focusing on the subject. [MF ASSIST] [OFF] [ON]: Centre of the screen will be enlarged automatically when the focus ring is rotated. • Refer to P74 for details. VQT2G62 129 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 130 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [ REC AREA] This changes the angle of view during motion picture recording and still picture recording. [!] (Picture)/[ ] (Motion picture) • The recording area indicated is a guide line. This will switch display between the number of recordable pictures and available recording time. [REMAINING DISP.] [REMAINING SHOTS]: This will display the number of recordable pictures for still pictures. [REMAINING TIME]: This will display the available recording time for motion pictures. [ BUTTON] [DIAL GUIDE] Enables/disables the motion picture button. [OFF]/[ON] Sets if the operation switch guide when the mode dial is switched to , , and is to be displayed or not. [OFF]/[ON] • It will display dial operation guide to the screen that is possible to perform Exposure Compensation, Programme Shift, aperture setting, or shutter speed setting when set to [ON]. A Dial operation guide A [MENU RESUME] The last operated menu position is saved even if the camera is turned off. [OFF]/[ON] [PIXEL REFRESH] It will perform optimization of imaging device and image processing. • Imaging device and image processing is optimised when the camera is purchased. Use this function when bright spots not in subject get recorded, and it is bothering you. • Turn the camera off and on after the pixels are corrected. 130 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 131 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Recording pictures) [SENSOR CLEANING] Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the rear of the imaging device is performed. • Dust reduction function will operate automatically when the camera is turned on, but you can use this function when you see dust. (P172) It is possible to setup so the shutter will not operate when there is no lens on the unit. [SHOOT W/O LENS] [OFF]: You cannot press the shutter button when a lens is not attached to the camera body or is not attached correctly. [ON]: Shutter will operate regardless of the lens on the unit. This will set the display style of the optional external viewfinder (P162) [LVF DISP.STYLE] [ ]: Viewfinder style [ ]: LCD monitor style • You can only select this function when the Optional External Viewfinder (P162) is attached. • Refer to P56 for details. VQT2G62 131 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 132 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Playback) Advanced (Playback) Playing Back Motion Pictures/Pictures with Audio • This unit was designed to play motion pictures and still pictures with audio using the QuickTime Motion JPEG and AVCHD Lite formats that were taken with this model (only). • Only [AVCHD Lite] motion pictures recorded with this unit and Panasonic digital cameras (LUMIX) can be played back with this unit as AVCHD Lite format. Press [(]. Motion pictures Press 2/1 to select a picture with a motion picture icon (such as [ ]), and then press 3 to play back. [AVCHD Lite] A [MOTION JPEG] B A B A Motion picture icon B The motion picture recording time • After playback starts, the elapsed playback time is displayed on the upper right of the screen. For example, 8 minutes and 30 seconds is displayed as [8m30s]. • Some information (recording information, etc.) is not displayed for motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD Lite]. ∫ Operations performed during motion picture playback The cursor displayed during playback is the same as 3/4/2/1. A B C D ¢ Play/Pause Stop Fast rewind, Frame-by-frame rewind¢ Fast forward, Frame-by-frame forward¢ These operations can be performed only in the Pause Mode. E Reduce volume level F Increase volume level Note • Please note that the bundled software includes QuickTime or “PHOTOfunSTUDIO 4.0 HD Edition” to play back motion picture files created with the camera on the PC. • QuickTime Motion JPEG motion pictures that were recorded with a PC or other equipment may have lower image quality or may not be able to play back with this unit. 132 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 133 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Playback) Pictures with audio Press 2/1 to select a picture with the audio icon [ and then press 3 to play back. ] A A Audio icon • Refer to [AUDIO REC.] (P124) and [AUDIO DUB.] (P147) for information about how to create still pictures with audio. Note • Sound can be heard through the speaker. Refer to [VOLUME] (P33) for information about how to adjust the volume in the [SETUP] menu. • Pictures with audio recorded with other equipment may not playback on this unit. • When using a high capacity card, it is possible that fast rewinding may be slower than usual. VQT2G62 133 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 134 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Playback) Using the [PLAYBACK] mode menu You can use various functions in playback mode to rotate pictures, set protection for them etc. • With [TEXT STAMP], [RESIZE], [TRIMMING] or [ASPECT CONV.], a new edited picture is created. A new picture cannot be created if there is no free space on the card so we recommend checking that there is free space and then editing the picture. [SLIDE SHOW] You can create a slide show and add music to enhance the presentation. In addition the pictures will play with a fixed interval between each of the picture that you select. You can select to play, only still pictures, only motion pictures, designated “favourite” pictures, or pictures registered with face recognition as a slide show. To best enjoy this feature it’s recommended that you connect your digital camera to your TV set. Select [SLIDE SHOW] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P28) Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET]. • [FAVORITE] can be selected only when [FAVORITE] on the [PLAYBACK] menu (P137) is at [ON] and there are pictures already set as favourites. When [ALL], [PICTURE ONLY], [MOTION PIC. ONLY] or [FAVORITE] has been selected in step 2 Press 3 to select [START] and then press [MENU/SET]. Press 4 to finish the slide show. • Normal playback resumes after the slide show finishes. When [CATEGORY SELECTION] has been selected in step 2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the category to play back and then press [MENU/SET] to set. • For details on categories, refer to P136. Press 3 to select [START] and then press [MENU/ SET]. 134 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 135 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Playback) Press 4 to finish the slide show. • Normal playback resumes after the slide show finishes. ∫ Operations performed during slide show The cursor displayed during playback is the same as 3/4/2/1. • The menu screen is restored when [‚] is pressed. A B C D ¢ Play/Pause Stop Back to previous picture¢ Ahead to next picture¢ These operations can be performed only in the Pause Mode or during motion picture playback. E Reduce volume level F Increase volume level ∫ Changing the slide show settings You can change the settings for slide show playback by selecting [EFFECT] or [SETUP] on the slide show menu screen. [EFFECT] This allows you to select the screen effects when switching from one picture to the next. [NATURAL], [SWING], [URBAN], [OFF] • When [URBAN] has been selected, the picture may appear in black and white as a screen effect. • [EFFECT] is set to [OFF] when playing a slide show with motion pictures only. [SETUP] [DURATION] or [REPEAT] can be set. Item Settings [DURATION] 1SEC./2SEC./3SEC./5SEC. [REPEAT] ON/OFF [MUSIC] ON/OFF [AUDIO] ON/OFF • [DURATION] can be set only when [OFF] has been selected as the [EFFECT] setting. • [AUDIO] can be set only when [OFF] has been selected as the [MUSIC] setting. Audio will be played along with the still picture with audio or audio of the motion picture by setting the [AUDIO] to [ON]. Note • Music effects cannot be played back simultaneously with motion pictures or still pictures with audio. • It is not possible to add new music effects. VQT2G62 135 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 136 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Playback) [PLAYBACK MODE] Playback in [NORMAL PLAY], [PICTURE PLAY], [AVCHD Lite PLAY], [MOTION JPEG PLAY], [CATEGORY PLAY] or [FAVORITE PLAY] can be selected. Select [PLAYBACK MODE] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P28) Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET]. • [FAVORITE PLAY] can be selected only when [FAVORITE] on the [PLAYBACK] menu (P137) is at [ON] and there are pictures already set as favourites. • Refer to P50 for information about how to play back pictures in [NORMAL PLAY], [PICTURE PLAY], [AVCHD Lite PLAY], [MOTION JPEG PLAY] or [FAVORITE PLAY] can be selected. When [CATEGORY PLAY] is selected in step 2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the category and then press [MENU/SET] to set. • If a picture is found in a category, the category icon turns blue. • It may take time to search the picture files if there are a lot on the card. • If you press [‚] while searching, the searching will stop halfway. • Pictures are sorted into the categories shown below. [CATEGORY] * , . Recording information e.g. Scene Modes [CATEGORY] Recording information e.g. Scene Modes [FACE RECOG.]¢ Î [BABY1]/[BABY2], [i-BABY] [PORTRAIT], [i-PORTRAIT], [SOFT SKIN], [NIGHT PORTRAIT], [i-NIGHT PORTRAIT], [BABY1]/[BABY2], [i-BABY] í [PET] [SCENERY], [i-SCENERY], [ARCHITECTURE], [SUNSET] 1 [FOOD] [NIGHT PORTRAIT], [i-NIGHT PORTRAIT], [NIGHT SCENERY], [i-NIGHT SCENERY], [ILLUMINATIONS] [SPORTS], [PARTY] [TRAVEL DATE] Í [AVCHD Lite], [MOTION JPEG] ¢ Press 3/4/2/1 to select the person to playback and then press [MENU/SET]. Face Recognition may not be possible or may not recognise faces correctly even for registered faces, depending on the facial expression and environment. Also, if there are multiple faces that are already registered in the picture, it will be categorized only once to the person found first in the registration. 136 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 137 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Playback) Ü [FAVORITE] You can do the following if a mark has been added to pictures and they have been set as favourites. • Play back the pictures set as favourites only as a slide show. • Play back only the pictures set as favourites. ([FAVORITE PLAY]) • Delete all the pictures not set as favourites. ([ALL DELETE EXCEPTÜ]) Select [FAVORITE] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P28) Press 4 to select [ON] and then press [MENU/SET]. • You cannot set pictures as favourites if [FAVORITE] is set to [OFF]. Also [Ü] will not appear when [FAVORITE] is set to [OFF] even if it was previously set to [ON]. Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press 4 to set it during playback. • Repeat the above procedure. • If 4 is pressed again, the favourite setting is cancelled. ∫ Cancelling all the [FAVORITE] settings 1 Select [CANCEL] on the screen shown in step 2 and then press [MENU/SET]. 2 Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET]. 3 Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. • You cannot select [CANCEL] if not even one picture has been set as a favourite. • [CANCEL] cannot be selected when in [PLAYBACK MODE]. Note • You can set up to 999 pictures as favourites. • When printing pictures at a photo printing store, [ALL DELETE EXCEPTÜ] (P54) is useful so only the pictures you want to be printed remain on the card. • You may not be able to set pictures taken with other equipment as favourites. • The motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD Lite] and pictures that were taken with the [QUALITY] set to [ ] cannot be set to [FAVORITE]. VQT2G62 137 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 138 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Playback) [TITLE EDIT] You can add text (comments) to pictures. After text has been registered, it can be included in prints using [TEXT STAMP] (P139). (Only alphabetic characters and symbols can be entered.) Names set in [BABY1]/[BABY2] and [PET] in Scene Mode or [LOCATION] in Travel Date are also recorded as the titles. Select [TITLE EDIT] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P28) Press 3/4 to select [SINGLE] or [MULTI] and then press [MENU/SET]. Select the picture, and then press [MENU/SET] to set. [SINGLE] [MULTI] • [’] is displayed for pictures with titles already registered. [MULTI] setting Press [DISPLAY] to set (repeat), and Press 2/1 to select Press 3/4/2/1 to then press [MENU/SET] to set. the picture. select the pictures. • The setting is cancelled when [DISPLAY] is pressed again. Press 3/4/2/1 to select text and then press [MENU/SET] to register. • Press [DISPLAY] to switch text between [A] (capitals), [a] (small case) and [&/1] (special characters and numbers). • The entry position cursor can be moved left and right with the rear dial. • To enter a blank, move the cursor to [SPACE] or to delete an entered character, move the cursor to [DELETE], and press [MENU/SET]. • To stop editing at any time during text entry, press [‚]. • A maximum of 30 characters can be entered. (Maximum of 9 characters when setting names in [FACE RECOG.]) Press 3/4/2/1 to move the cursor to [EXIT] and then press [MENU/SET] to end text input. Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.¢ ¢The menu screen is automatically restored when [MULTI] is selected. • Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. 138 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 139 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Playback) ∫ Delete the title [SINGLE] setting 1 In step 4, delete all the texts, select [EXIT], and press [MENU/SET]. 2 Press [‚]. 3 Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. [MULTI] setting 1 Select [EXIT] without entering text in step 4, and then press [MENU/SET]. 2 Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. Note • Text can be scrolled if all of the registered text does not fit on the screen. • The name setting of [FACE RECOG.] or [BABY1]/[BABY2] and [PET] in Scene Mode or [LOCATION] in Travel Date can also be registered by using the operation in steps 4 and following. • The name setting of [BABY1]/[BABY2] or [PET] in Scene Mode, [LOCATION] in Travel Date and [TITLE EDIT] cannot be registered at the same time. • You can print out texts (comments) using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO 4.0 HD Edition” bundled software on the CD-ROM (supplied). • You can set up to 50 pictures at one time with [MULTI]. • You cannot use title edit for the following pictures. – Motion pictures – Protected pictures – Pictures taken with [ ], [ ] or [ ] – Pictures recorded with other equipment [TEXT STAMP] You can stamp the recording date/time, age, travel date or title onto the recorded pictures. It is suitable for regular size printing. (Pictures with a picture size larger than [S] will be resized when stamping the date etc. on them.) Select [TEXT STAMP] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P28) Press 3/4 to select [SINGLE] or [MULTI] and then press [MENU/SET]. Select the picture, and then press [MENU/SET] to set. [SINGLE] [MULTI] • [‘] appears on screen if the picture is stamped with text. [MULTI] setting Press [DISPLAY] to set (repeat), and Press 2/1 to select Press 3/4/2/1 to then press [MENU/SET] to set. the picture. select the pictures. • The setting is cancelled when [DISPLAY] is pressed again. VQT2G62 139 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 140 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Playback) Press 3/4/2/1 to select [SHOOTING DATE], [AGE], [TRAVEL DATE] or [TITLE] and then press [MENU/SET] to set each item. [SHOOTING DATE] [W/OTIME]: Stamp the year, month and date. [WITHTIME]: Stamp the year, month, day, hour and minutes. [AGE] (P92) If this is set to [ON], [AGE] is stamped on the pictures. [TRAVEL DATE] If this is set to [ON], [TRAVEL DATE] is stamped on the pictures. [TITLE] Text is printed together with the image for pictures that have already been recorded with text in [FACE RECOG.] or [BABY1]/[BABY2] and [PET] name settings in Scene Mode, [LOCATION] in Travel Date or [TITLE EDIT]. Press [MENU/SET]. • If you set [TEXT STAMP] for a picture with a picture size larger than [S], the picture size will become smaller as shown below. Aspect ratio setting Picture size > X / Y / > W / > / > • The picture becomes slightly rougher. Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET]. • The message [SAVE NEW PICTURES?] appears if the picture was recorded with a picture size [S]. Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.¢ ¢The menu screen is automatically restored when [MULTI] is selected. • Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. Note • When you print pictures stamped with text, the date will be printed over the stamped text if you specify printing of the date at the photo shop or on the printer. • You can set up to 50 pictures at one time in [MULTI]. • Depending on the printer being used, some characters may be cut at printing. Check before printing. • Text and dates cannot be stamped on the pictures in the following cases. – Motion pictures – Pictures with audio – Pictures recorded without setting the clock and title – Pictures that were previously stamped with [TEXT STAMP] – Pictures taken with [ ], [ ] or [ ] – Pictures recorded with other equipment 140 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 141 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Playback) Q [RESIZE] Reducing the picture size (number of pixels) We recommend resizing to [S] if you want to attach a picture to an e-mail or use it on a website. (Pictures set to the minimum number of pixels for [ASPECT RATIO] cannot be further reduced in size.) Select [RESIZE] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P28) Press 3/4 to select [SINGLE] or [MULTI] and then press [MENU/SET]. Select the picture and size. 1 2 [SINGLE] setting Press 2/1 to select the picture, and then press [MENU/SET]. Press 2/1 to select the size¢, and then press [MENU/SET]. [SINGLE] ¢ Only the sizes to which the pictures can be resized is displayed. 1 2 [MULTI] setting Press 3/4 to select the size, and then press [MENU/SET]. Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture, and then press [DISPLAY]. [MULTI] • Repeat this step for each picture, and press [MENU/SET] to set. Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET]. Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.¢ ¢The menu screen is automatically restored when [MULTI] is selected. • Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. Note • You can set up to 50 pictures at one time in [MULTI]. • The picture quality of the resized picture will deteriorate. • It may not be possible to resize pictures recorded with other equipment. • Motion pictures, pictures with audio, pictures stamped with [TEXT STAMP] and pictures taken with [ ], [ ] or [ ] cannot be resized. VQT2G62 141 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 142 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Playback) [TRIMMING] You can enlarge and then clip the important part of the recorded picture. Select [TRIMMING] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P28) Press 2/1 to select the picture, and then press [MENU/SET]. Use the rear dial and press 3/4/2/1 to select the parts to be trimmed. Reduction Rear dial (right): Enlargement Rear dial (left): Reduction 3/4/2/1: Move Enlargement () Move the position () Press [MENU/SET]. Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET]. Press [‚] to return to the menu screen. • Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. Note • Depending on the cut size, the picture size of the trimmed picture may become smaller than that of the original picture. • The picture quality of the trimmed picture will deteriorate. • It may not be possible to trim pictures recorded with other equipment. • Motion pictures, pictures with audio, pictures stamped with [TEXT STAMP] and pictures taken with [ ], [ ] or [ ] cannot be trimmed. • Information regarding the face recognition in the original picture will not be copied to images having undergone [TRIMMING]. 142 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 143 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Playback) ? [ASPECT CONV.] You can convert pictures taken with a [W] aspect ratio to a [Y], a [X] or a [ ratio. ] aspect Select [ASPECT CONV.] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P28) Press 3/4 to select [Y], [X] or [ press [MENU/SET]. ] and then Press 2/1 to select a picture taken with [W] aspect ratio, and then press [MENU/SET]. Press 2/1 to determine the horizontal position, and press [MENU/SET] to set. • Use 3/4 to set the frame position for pictures rotated vertically. Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET]. Press [‚] to return to the menu screen. • Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. Note • After converting the aspect ratio, the picture size may become larger than that of the original picture. • You may not be able to convert pictures taken on other equipment. • The [ASPECT CONV.] cannot be performed on the motion pictures, pictures with audio, pictures stamped with [TEXT STAMP] and pictures taken with [ ], [ ] or [ ]. • Information regarding the face recognition in the original picture will not be copied to images having undergone [ASPECT CONV.]. VQT2G62 143 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 144 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Playback) N [ROTATE]/M [ROTATE DISP.] This mode allows you to automatically display pictures vertically if they were recorded holding the camera vertically or rotate pictures manually in 90o steps. Rotate (The picture is rotated manually) Select [ROTATE] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P28) • The [ROTATE] function is disabled when [ROTATE DISP.] is set to [OFF]. Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press [MENU/SET]. • Motion pictures and protected pictures cannot be rotated. Press 3/4 to select the direction to rotate the picture and then press [MENU/SET]. : The picture rotates clockwise in steps of 90o. : The picture rotates counter-clockwise in steps of 90o. Press [‚] to return to the menu screen. • Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. Rotate display (The picture is automatically rotated and displayed) Select [ROTATE DISP.] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P28) Press 4 to select [ON] and then press [MENU/SET]. • The pictures are displayed without being rotated when you select [OFF]. • Refer to P50 for information about how to play back pictures. Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. Note • [ROTATE DISP.] can only be used with the lens (P14) compatible with the Direction Detection Function (P37). • When you play back pictures on a PC, they cannot be displayed in the rotated direction unless the OS or software is compatible with Exif. Exif is a file format for still pictures which allows recording information etc. to be added. It was established by “JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association)”. • It may not be possible to rotate pictures that have been recorded with other equipment. • The picture will not rotate display when Multi Playback (P51) or Calendar Playback (P52) is selected. • Pictures recorded with the camera upside down will not be displayed rotated. 144 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 145 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Playback) [PRINT SET] DPOF “Digital Print Order Format” is a system that allows the user to select which pictures to print, how many copies of each picture to print and whether or not to print the recording date on the pictures when using a DPOF compatible photo printer or photo printing store. For details, ask at your photo printing store. Select [PRINT SET] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P28) Press 3/4 to select [SINGLE] or [MULTI] and then press [MENU/SET]. Select the picture, and then press [MENU/SET]. [SINGLE] [MULTI] Press 2/1 to select Press 3/4/2/1 to the picture. select the pictures. Press 3/4 to set the number of prints, and then press [MENU/SET] to set. • When [MULTI] has been selected, repeat steps 3 and 4 for each picture. (It is not possible to use the same setting for a multiple number of pictures.) Press [‚] to return to the menu screen. • Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. ∫ Cancelling all the [PRINT SET] settings 1 Select [CANCEL] on the screen shown in step 2 and then press [MENU/SET]. 2 Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET]. 3 Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. • You cannot select [CANCEL] if not even one picture has been set for printing. ∫ To print the date After setting the number of prints, set/cancel printing with the recording date by pressing [DISPLAY]. • When you go to a photo printing store for digital printing, be sure to order the printing of the date additionally if required. • Depending on the photo printing store or the printer, the date may not be printed even if you set to print the date. For further information, ask at your photo printing store or refer to the operating instructions for the printer. • The date cannot be printed on pictures stamped with text. VQT2G62 145 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 146 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Playback) Note • The number of prints can be set from 0 to 999. • With a printer supporting PictBridge, the date print settings of the printer may take precedence so check if this is the case. • It may not be possible to use the print settings with other equipment. In this case, cancel all the settings, and reset the settings. • If the file is not based on the DCF standard, the print setting cannot be set. • [PRINT SET] cannot be set for motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD Lite] and pictures that were taken with the [QUALITY] set to [ ]. P [PROTECT] You can set protection for pictures you do not want to be deleted by mistake. Select [PROTECT] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P28) Press 3/4 to select [SINGLE] or [MULTI] and then press [MENU/SET]. Select the picture, and then press [MENU/SET]. [SINGLE] [MULTI] When [MULTI] has been selected • Repeat these steps for each picture. • The settings are cancelled when [MENU/SET] is pressed again. Press 2/1 to select Press 3/4/2/1 to the picture. select the pictures. Press [‚] to return to the menu screen. • Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. ∫ Cancelling all the [PROTECT] settings 1 Select [CANCEL] on the screen shown in step 2 and then press [MENU/SET]. 2 Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET]. 3 Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. • If you press [MENU/SET] while cancelling protection, the cancelling will stop halfway. Note • The protect setting may not be effective on other equipment. • Even if you protect pictures on a card, they will be deleted if the card is formatted. • Even if you do not protect pictures on an SD Memory Card or an SDHC Memory Card, they cannot be deleted when the card’s Write-Protect switch is set to [LOCK]. 146 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 147 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Playback) B [AUDIO DUB.] You can add the audio after taking a picture. Select [AUDIO DUB.] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P28) Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press [MENU/SET] to start audio recording. • The message [OVERWRITE AUDIO DATA?] screen appears when audio has already been recorded. Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET] to start audio recording. (The original audio is overwritten.) • Audio is recorded from the built-in microphone on the camera. • If you press [‚], the audio dubbing is cancelled. Press [MENU/SET] to stop recording. • It will automatically stop after recording about 10 seconds without pressing [MENU/SET]. Press [‚] to return to the menu screen. • Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. Note • Audio dubbing may not work properly on pictures recorded by other equipment. • Audio dubbing does not work on motion pictures, protected pictures and pictures taken with [ ], [ ] or [ ]. • Sound from motion pictures (When [REC MODE] is set to [MOTION JPEG]) or pictures with audio recorded by this camera cannot be played back by older models of Panasonic digital cameras (LUMIX) launched before July 2008. VQT2G62 147 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 148 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Advanced (Playback) [FACE REC EDIT] You can clear and replace all information relating to face recognition in selected images. Select [FACE REC EDIT] on the [PLAYBACK] Mode menu. (P28) Press 3/4 to select [REPLACE] or [DELETE] and then press [MENU/SET]. Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press [MENU/SET]. • You cannot select pictures for which Face Recognition information has not been registered. Press 2/1 to select the person and then press [MENU/SET]. • [DELETE] > step 6. • You cannot select a person who has not been registered. Press 3/4/2/1 to select the person to replace and then press [MENU/SET]. Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/ SET]. Press [‚] to return to the menu screen. • Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. Note • Cleared information regarding the [FACE RECOG.] cannot be restored. • When all Face Recognition information in a picture has been cancelled, the picture will not be categorised using Face Recognition in [CATEGORY PLAY]. • You cannot edit the Face Recognition information of protected pictures. 148 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 149 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Connecting to other equipment Connecting to other equipment Playing Back Pictures on a TV Screen Playing back pictures using the AV cable (supplied) Preparations: Set the [TV ASPECT]. (P34) Turn this unit and the TV off. 1 Yellow: to the video input socket 2 White: to the audio input socket A Align the marks, and insert. B AV cable (supplied) • Check the directions of the connectors, and plug them straight in or unplug them straight out. (Otherwise the connectors may be bent out of shape which may cause malfunction.) Connect the AV cable B (supplied) to the video input and the audio input sockets on the TV. Connect the AV cable to the [AV OUT] socket on the camera. Turn the TV on and select external input. Turn the camera on and then press [(]. Note • Depending on the [ASPECT RATIO], black bands may be displayed on the top and bottom or the left and right of the pictures. • Do not use any other AV cables except the supplied one. • Read the operating instructions for the TV. • When you play back a picture vertically, it may be blurry. • You can view pictures on TVs in other countries (regions) which use the NTSC or PAL system when you set [VIDEO OUT] in the [SETUP] menu. • Audio will be played back in monaural. • If the optional external viewfinder (P162) is installed, pictures will not be displayed when the camera is connected with the AV cable. VQT2G62 149 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 150 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Connecting to other equipment Playing back pictures on a TV with an SD Memory Card slot Still pictures recorded on an SD Memory Card can be played back on a TV with an SD Memory Card slot. Note • Depending on the TV model, pictures may not be displayed on the full screen. • Motion pictures recorded with [AVCHD Lite] can be played back on Panasonic TVs (VIERA) with the AVCHD logo mark. In all other cases, connect the camera to the TV using the AV cable (supplied) and play back the motion picture. • You cannot play back pictures on SDHC cards if the TV does not support these cards. Playing back on the TV with HDMI socket You can enjoy high quality pictures and motion pictures on the TV by connecting the camera with the HDMI compatible high definition TV using HDMI mini cable (optional). What is HDMI? HDMI is the interface for digital devices. When this unit is connected to a HDMI compatible device, the image and audio can be output with a digital signal. If you connect this unit to a HDMI compatible high definition TV and then play back the recorded high definition images, you can enjoy them in high resolution with high quality sound. If you connect this unit to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link, linked operations (VIERA Link) are possible. (P151) Preparations: Check the [HDMI MODE]. (P35) Turn this unit and the TV off. HDMI IN 1 HDMI socket 2 TV with HDMI socket 3 HDMI mini (C type) A Align the marks, and insert. B HDMI mini cable (optional) • Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug. (It may result in malfunction if it is plugged in obliquely or in the wrong direction.) Connect the HDMI mini cable B (optional) to the HDMI input socket on the TV. 150 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 151 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Connecting to other equipment Connect the HDMI mini cable to the [HDMI] socket on the camera. Turn the TV on and switch to HDMI input. Turn the camera on and then press [(]. • When [VIERA Link] (P35) is set to [ON] and the camera is connected to a TV supporting VIERA Link, input of the TV will be switched automatically and playback screen will be displayed (P151). Note • Depending on the [ASPECT RATIO], bands may be displayed on the top and bottom or the left and right of the pictures. • Do not use any other cables except a genuine Panasonic HDMI mini cable (RP-CDHM15, RP-CDHM30; optional). Part numbers: RP-CDHM15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHM30 (3.0 m) • Output from the HDMI mini cable has priority when both AV cable and HDMI mini cable are connected. • HDMI output is not possible even if you connect the HDMI mini cable while the unit is connected to the PC or the printer. • HDMI connection is disabled and the connection with the USB connection cable will take priority when you connect the USB connection cable while it is outputting via the HDMI mini cable. • Image is not displayed on the LCD monitor/optional external viewfinder when the HDMI mini cable is connected. • [AUDIO DUB.] does not work when connected with a HDMI mini cable. • When pictures are displayed, they may not be displayed properly depending on the type of TV. • Read the operating instructions for the TV. • Audio will be played back in monaural. Playback using VIERA Link (HDMI) (HDAVI Control™) What is the VIERA Link? • This function allows you to use your remote control for the Panasonic TV for easy operations when this unit has been connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using a HDMI mini cable (optional) for automatic linked operations. (Not all operations are possible.) • VIERA Link is a unique Panasonic function built on a HDMI control function using the standard HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) specification. Linked operations with HDMI CEC compatible devices made by other companies are not guaranteed. When using devices made by other companies that are compatible with VIERA Link, refer to the operating instructions for the respective devices. • This unit is compatible with VIERA Link Ver.4. VIERA Link Ver.4 is the newest Panasonic version and is also compatible with existing Panasonic VIERA Link devices. (As of December 2008) Preparations: Set the [VIERA Link] to [ON]. (P35) Connect this unit to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link with a HDMI mini cable (optional) (P150). Turn the camera on and then press [(]. VQT2G62 151 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 152 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Connecting to other equipment Operate with the remote control for the TV. Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link 1 [OPTION] 2 [OK] 3 [RETURN] ¢ The shape of the remote control varies depending on the region. Operate following the TV guide displayed on screen. ∫ Usable functions Operate with the remote control for the TV. 1) Multi playback Press red button on the TV remote control to switch the type of data for playback. • The type of data for playback changes in the order of [ALL] > [ ]>[ ] > [ ] > [ALL]. Select the picture with 3/4/2/1 and press 2 for one screen display. • You can set the slide show etc. when you press 1. 2) One screen display Select the image with 2/1. Recording information is displayed with 3. You can return to multi playback (1) with 4. • When you select a motion picture and perform one screen display, press 2 to playback the motion picture. • During motion picture playback, use 2/1 for back/forward and 4 to stop playback. 3) Slide show Display the slide show setting screen by pressing red button in the one screen display (2). Select [START] and press 2. The screen will be returned to one screen display (2) by pressing 4 to finish the slide show. • Press 2 to pause. When the slideshow is paused, you can move between the pictures using 2/1. • Press 1 to display the slide show setting screen. • Playing audio in the slideshow Set [MUSIC] to [OFF] and [AUDIO] to [ON] in the slide show setting screen. • Turning control icon display on and off Operation icons can be hidden when you press 3. Also, operation icons will be displayed when you press 1 while the operation icons are hidden. 152 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 153 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Connecting to other equipment Note • It is recommended to connect this unit to an HDMI terminal other than the HDMI1 if there are 2 or more HDMI input terminals on the TV. • When the [VIERA Link] (P35) of this unit is set to [ON], operation using the button on this unit will be limited. • VIERA Link must be activated on the connected TV. (Read the operating instructions of the TV for how to set etc.) • If you are not using VIERA Link, set [VIERA Link] (P35) to [OFF]. ∫ Other linked operations Turning the power off: If you use the remote control for the TV to turn off the power, the power on this unit also turns off. (When connecting the unit to a PC with a USB cable, the power will not turn off.) Automatic input switching: • If you connect with a HDMI mini cable and then turn on the power on this unit, and then press [(], the input channel on the TV automatically switches to this unit’s screen. If the TV’s power is in standby status, it will turn on automatically (if [Set] has been selected for the TV’s [Power on link] setting). • Depending on the HDMI terminal on the TV, the input channel may not switch automatically. In this case, use the remote control for the TV to switch the input channel. (For details on how to switch input, please read the operating instructions for the TV.) • If VIERA Link does not work properly, refer to page 184. Note • If you are unsure whether or not the TV you are using are compatible with VIERA Link, read the operating instructions for the devices. • Available linked operations between this unit and a Panasonic TV is different depending on the types of Panasonic TVs even if they are compatible with VIERA Link. Refer to the operating instructions of the TV for the operations that support on the TV. • Operation is not possible with a cable that is not based on the HDMI standard. Do not use any other cables except a genuine Panasonic HDMI mini cable (RP-CDHM15, RP-CDHM30; optional). Part numbers: RP-CDHM15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHM30 (3.0 m) • VIERA Link will not work even if you connect the HDMI mini cable while the unit is connected to the PC or the printer. • [HDMI MODE] (P35) [1080i] is valid only for the following conditions: Outputting to HDMI: – When [PICTURE PLAY], [CATEGORY PLAY]¢ are selected in the [PLAYBACK MODE] – When [PICTURE ONLY] is selected in the [SLIDE SHOW] – When [CATEGORY SELECTION]¢ is selected in the [SLIDE SHOW] When the [VIERA Link] is set to [ON]: – During playback of still pictures on one screen after selecting [ ] displayed on the TV screen – When [PICTURE ONLY] is selected for the [SLIDE SHOW] – When [CATEGORY SELECTION]¢ is selected in the [SLIDE SHOW] – When [CATEGORY PLAY]¢ is selected in the [ALL], [ ] ¢Except [ ] ([TRAVEL DATE]) or [Í] ([AVCHD Lite], [MOTION JPEG]) • It will be output as [720p] except for the above conditions. • The screen will be blacked out for a while if the [HDMI MODE] (P35) is changed when the [HDMI MODE] (P35) of this unit is set to [AUTO] or [1080i], and [ ] displayed on the TV screen is selected and displayed in 1 screen, but this is not a malfunction. • If the picture is disrupted when [HDMI MODE] (P35) is set to [AUTO] or [1080i], change the setting to [720p]. •[ ] ([TRAVEL DATE]) or [Í] ([AVCHD Lite], [MOTION JPEG]) in the [CATEGORY SELECTION] of the [SLIDE SHOW] cannot be selected when the [ ] displayed on the TV screen is selected. VQT2G62 153 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 154 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Connecting to other equipment Saving the recorded still pictures and motion pictures Methods to export still pictures and motion pictures to other devices will vary depending on the file format. (JPEG, RAW, AVCHD Lite, or Motion JPEG). Here are a few suggestions. Copy the playback image using an AV cable File formats that can be used: [AVCHD Lite], [Motion JPEG] Copy images played back with this unit to DVD disc, hard disk, or video using a DVD recorder, or video. This can be played back with equipment that is not compatible with high definition (AVCHD), so it is convenient for distributing copies. Image will be standard quality instead of high definition at this time. 1 Yellow: to the video input socket 2 White: to the audio input socket A AV cable (supplied) 1 2 3 Connect this unit with the recording equipment with an AV cable (supplied) Start the playback of this unit Start the recording on the recording equipment • When ending the recording (copying), stop the playback on this unit after stopping the recording in recording equipment. Note • When you play back motion pictures on 4:3 aspect ratio TV, you must set [TV ASPECT] (P34) on this unit to [4:3] before starting a copy. The image will be vertically long if you play back motion pictures copied with [16:9] setting on a [4:3] aspect TV. • Do not use any other AV cables except the supplied one. • It is recommended to turn off the display of the screen by pressing the [DISPLAY] on the camera while copying. (P51) • See the instruction manual for the recording equipment about the details of copying and playing back. 154 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 155 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Connecting to other equipment Copying to a PC File formats that can be used: [JPEG], [RAW]/[AVCHD Lite], [Motion JPEG] It is possible to acquire still pictures and motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD Lite] or [MOTION JPEG] formats, or create standard quality DVD video which is not high definition from the motion picture that was recorded as [AVCHD Lite], using the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO 4.0 HD Edition” in the CD-ROM (supplied). (P155) • If the files and folders related to [AVCHD Lite] motion pictures are deleted, modified, or moved by the Windows Explorer or similar, it becomes unable to perform playback, edit, etc., so always use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO 4.0 HD Edition” to acquire the [AVCHD Lite] motion pictures. Connecting to a PC You can acquire recorded pictures to a PC by connecting the camera and the PC. • You can easily print out or mail the pictures you have imported. Use of the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO 4.0 HD Edition” bundled software on the CD-ROM (supplied) is a convenient way of doing this. • Read the separate operating instructions for the supplied software for more information about the software in the CD-ROM (supplied) and how to install it. ∫ PC that can be used Windows Me/2000 XP/Vista Macintosh OS 9/OS X — ≤¢1 — — ≤¢2 — 98/98SE Can the PHOTOfunSTUDIO be used? Can the [AVCHD Lite] motion picture be acquired to the PC? Can the still pictures and [MOTION JPEG] motion pictures in the digital camera be acquired to the PC using a USB connection cable? — ≤ ≤ (OS 9.2.2/OS X [10.1~10.5]) • PC with Windows 98/98SE or older, or Mac OS 8.x or older cannot be connected via USB, but it can acquire the pictures if an SD memory card reader/writer can be used. ¢1 It is necessary for Internet Explorer 6.0 or newer to be installed. PC with higher processing performance is required depending on the function to be used. It may not play back correctly or operate correctly depending on the environment of the PC used. ¢2 Always acquire the [AVCHD Lite] motion pictures using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO 4.0 HD Edition”. VQT2G62 155 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 156 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Connecting to other equipment Acquiring of still pictures and [MOTION JPEG] motion pictures (other than [AVCHD Lite] motion pictures) Preparations: Turn on the camera and the PC. A USB connection cable (supplied) • Check the directions of the connectors, and plug them straight in or unplug them straight out. (Otherwise the connectors may be bent out of shape which may cause malfunction.) B Align the marks, and insert. C DC cable (DMW-DCC3; optional) • Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (P167). If the remaining battery power becomes low while the camera and the PC are communicating, the status indicator blinks and the alarm beeps. Refer to “Disconnecting the USB connection cable safely” (P157) before disconnecting the USB connection cable. Otherwise, data may be destroyed. Connect the camera to a PC via the USB connection cable A (supplied). • Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one. Use of cables other than the supplied USB connection cable may cause malfunction. Press 3/4 to select [PC], and then press [MENU/SET]. USB MODE PLEASE SELECT THE USB MODE • If [USB MODE] (P34) is set to [PC] in the [SETUP] menu in PictBridge(PTP) advance, the camera will be automatically connected to the PC PC without displaying the [USB MODE] selection screen. Since SELECT SET there is no need to set this each time you connect to the PC, it is convenient. • When the camera has been connected to the PC with [USB MODE] set to [PictBridge(PTP)], a message may appear on the PC’s screen. Select [Cancel] to close the screen, and disconnect the camera from the PC. Then set [USB MODE] to [PC] again. MENU Double-click on [Removable Disk] in [My Computer]. • When using a Macintosh, the drive is displayed on the desktop. (“LUMIX”, “NO_NAME” or “Untitled” is displayed.) Double-click [DCIM] folder. 156 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 157 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Connecting to other equipment Using a drag-and-drop operation, move the pictures you want to acquire or the folder storing those pictures to any different folder on the PC. ∫ Disconnecting the USB connection cable safely • Proceed with the hardware removal using “Safely Remove Hardware” on the task tray of the PC. If the icon is not displayed, check that [ACCESS] is not displayed on the LCD monitor of the digital camera before removing the hardware. Note • Turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor (P167). • Before inserting or removing a card, turn the camera off and disconnect the USB connection cable. Otherwise, data may be destroyed. • HDMI connection is disabled and connection with the USB connection cable will take priority when you connect the USB connection cable while the HDMI mini cable is connected (P150). ∫ Viewing the contents of the card using the PC (folder composition) • Folders and images processed in the PC cannot be played back on the camera. It is recommended to use the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO 4.0 HD Edition” bundled software on the CD-ROM (supplied) when you write the image from PC to a card. Folder number Colour space P: sRGB _: AdobeRGB 3 File number 4 JPG: Pictures MOV: [MOTION JPEG] RW2: Pictures in RAW files MISC: DPOF print Favourite AVCHD: [AVCHD Lite] Motion pictures 1 2 A new folder is created when pictures are taken in the following situations. • After [NO.RESET] (P34) in the [SETUP] menu has been executed • When a card containing a folder with the same folder number has been inserted (Such as when pictures were taken using another make of camera) • When there is a picture with file number 999 inside the folder ∫ Connection in the PTP mode (WindowsR XP, Windows VistaR and Mac OS X only) Set [USB MODE] to [PictBridge(PTP)]. Data can now be read only from the card into the PC. • When there are 1000 or more pictures on a card, the pictures may not be imported in the PTP mode. • [AVCHD Lite] motion picture cannot be played back in PTP mode. VQT2G62 157 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 158 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Connecting to other equipment Printing the Pictures If you connect the camera to a printer supporting PictBridge, you can select the pictures to be printed out and instruct that printing be started on the camera’s LCD monitor. Preparations: Turn on the camera and the printer. Perform the print quality and other settings at the printer before printing the pictures. A USB connection cable (supplied) • Check the directions of the connectors, and plug them straight in or unplug them straight out. (Otherwise the connectors may be bent out of shape which may cause malfunction.) B Align the marks, and insert. C DC cable (DMW-DCC3; optional) • Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (P167). If the remaining battery power becomes low while the camera and the printer are connected, the status indicator blinks and the alarm beeps. If this happens during printing, stop printing at once. If not printing, disconnect the USB connection cable. Connect the camera to a printer via the USB connection cable A (supplied). • When the camera is connected to the printer, the cable disconnect prohibit icon [å] appears. Do not disconnect the USB cable while [å] is displayed. Press 3/4 to select [PictBridge(PTP)], and then press [MENU/SET]. USB MODE PLEASE SELECT THE USB MODE PictBridge(PTP) PC SELECT SET MENU Note • Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one. Use of cables other than the supplied USB connection cable may cause malfunction. • Turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor (P167). • Before inserting or removing a card, turn the camera off, and disconnect the USB connection cable. • HDMI connection is disabled and connection with the USB connection cable will take priority when you connect the USB connection cable while the HDMI mini cable is connected (P150). • Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD Lite] cannot be printed out. 158 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 159 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Connecting to other equipment Selecting a single picture and printing it Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press [MENU/SET]. • The message disappears in about 2 seconds. PictBridge 100_0001 PLEASE SELECT THE PICTURE TO PRINT SELECT MULITI PRINT Press 3 to select [PRINT START] and then press [MENU/SET]. • Refer to P160 for the items which can be set before starting to print the pictures. • Press [MENU/SET] to cancel printing halfway. • Disconnect the USB connection cable after printing. PRINT SINGLE SELECT PRINT START PRINT WITH DATE NUM. OF PRINTS PAPER SIZE PAGE LAYOUT CANCEL MENU OFF 1 SELECT SET MENU Selecting multiple pictures and printing them Press 3. Press 3/4 to select an item and then press [MENU/SET]. • If the print check screen has appeared, select [YES], and print the pictures. Item PictBridge MULTI SELECT SELECT ALL PRINT SET (DPOF) FAVORITE CANCEL SELECT SET MENU Description of settings [MULTI SELECT] Multiple pictures are printed at one time. • Press 3/4/2/1 to select the pictures, and then When [DISPLAY] is pressed, [é] appears on the pictures to be printed. (When [DISPLAY] is pressed again, the setting is cancelled.) • After the pictures have been selected, press [MENU/SET]. [SELECT ALL] Prints all the stored pictures. [PRINT SET (DPOF)] Prints the pictures set in [PRINT SET] only. (P145) [FAVORITE]¢ Prints the pictures set as favourites only. (P137) ¢ Only when [FAVORITE] is at [ON] and when there are pictures set as favourites. (P137) Press 3 to select [PRINT START] and then press [MENU/SET]. • Refer to P160 for the items which can be set before starting to print the pictures. • Press [MENU/SET] to cancel printing. • Disconnect the USB connection cable after printing. MULTI SELECT PRINT START PRINT WITH DATE NUM. OF PRINTS PAPER SIZE PAGE LAYOUT CANCEL OFF 1 SELECT SET VQT2G62 MENU 159 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 160 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Connecting to other equipment Print Settings Select and set the items both on the screen in step 2 of the “Selecting a single picture and printing it” and in step 3 of the “Selecting multiple pictures and printing them” procedures. MULTI SELECT PRINT START PRINT WITH DATE NUM. OF PRINTS PAPER SIZE PAGE LAYOUT • When you want to print pictures on a paper size or a layout which is not supported by the camera, set [PAPER SIZE] or [PAGE LAYOUT] CANCEL to [{] and then set the paper size or the layout on the printer. (For details, refer to the operating instructions of the printer.) • When [PRINT SET (DPOF)] has been selected, the [PRINT WITH DATE] and [NUM. OF PRINTS] items are not displayed. SELECT OFF 1 EXIT MENU [PRINT WITH DATE] Item Description of settings [OFF] Date is not printed. [ON] Date is printed. • If the printer does not support date printing, the date cannot be printed on the picture. • Since the printer’s settings may take precedence over the print with date setting, check the printer’s print with date setting as well. • When printing images with a text stamp, please remember to set print with date to [OFF] or the date will print on top. • In some printers, the picture date for pictures taken with the aspect ratio set to [ ] will be printed vertically. Note When asking the photo shop to print the pictures • By stamping the date using [TEXT STAMP] (P139) or setting date printing at the time of the [PRINT SET] (P145) setting before going to a photo shop, the dates can be printed at the photo shop. [NUM. OF PRINTS] You can set the number of prints up to 999. • You can also use the rear dial to set. [PAPER SIZE] Item Description of settings Settings on the printer are prioritised. { [L/3.5qk5q] 89 mmk127 mm [2L/5qk7q] 127 mmk178 mm [POSTCARD] 100 mmk148 mm [16:9] 101.6 mmk180.6 mm [A4] 210 mmk297 mm [A3] 297 mmk420 mm [10k15cm] 100 mmk150 mm 160 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 161 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Connecting to other equipment [4qk6q] 101.6 mmk152.4 mm [8qk10q] 203.2 mmk254 mm [LETTER] 216 mmk279.4 mm [CARD SIZE] 54 mmk85.6 mm • Paper sizes not supported by the printer will not be displayed. [PAGE LAYOUT] (Layouts for printing that can be set with this unit) Item Description of settings { Settings on the printer are prioritised. á 1 picture with no frame on 1 page â 1 picture with a frame on 1 page ã 2 pictures on 1 page ä 4 pictures on 1 page • An item cannot be selected if the printer does not support the page layout. ∫ Layout printing When printing a picture several times on 1 sheet of paper For example, if you want to print the same picture 4 times on 1 sheet of paper, set [PAGE LAYOUT] to [ä] and then set [NUM. OF PRINTS] to 4 for the picture that you want to print. When printing different pictures on 1 sheet of paper For example, if you want to print 4 different pictures on 1 sheet of paper, set [PAGE LAYOUT] to [ä] and then set [NUM. OF PRINTS] to 1 for each of the 4 pictures. Note • The camera is receiving an error message from the printer when the [¥] indication lights orange during printing. After finishing printing, make sure there are no problems with the printer. • If the number of prints is high, the pictures may be printed several times. In this case, the remaining number of prints indicated may differ from the number set. • When the pictures in RAW files are to be printed, the JPEG pictures recorded simultaneously by the camera will be printed. If JPEG pictures do not exist, RAW file pictures cannot be printed. VQT2G62 161 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 162 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others Others Using the Optional External Viewfinder When using the external live viewfinder (DMW-LVF1; optional), you can view the recording screen even when taking pictures with a low camera angle. Preparations: • Turn off the camera. • Remove the hot shoe cover that is attached to the camera. (P13) Insert the optional external viewfinder fully and securely into the hot shoe • Press the lower part of the external viewfinder with your finger, and securely insert the connector as well. (Do not press on the viewfinder part) A Hot shoe B Dedicated connector for external viewfinder C [LVF/LCD] D Finder Switch [ON] the camera. • [ ] is displayed on the LCD monitor. It may not be connected properly if it does not display. Switch to and from the optional external viewfinder by pressing [LVF/ LCD]. • You can switch between LCD (LCD monitor) display and LVF (Viewfinder) display. • Switching via the [LVF/LCD] button will be maintained even when the power of the digital camera is turned [OFF]. ∫ To remove the optional external viewfinder 1 Switch the power [OFF] 2 Return the angle of the external viewfinder to its original position if it has changed. 3 Pull in the direction of the arrow and remove • Reattach the hot shoe cover in its original position. 162 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 163 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others ∫ Diopter adjustment Adjust the diopter to suit your vision so that you can see the Viewfinder clearly. Look at the display on the Viewfinder and rotate the diopter adjustment dial to where the screen is clearest. A diopter adjustment dial B [LVF/LCD] P −3 0 +3 AUTO AWB 9 ∫ About the settings for recording with a low camera angle Based on the camera angle, set the angle of the optional external viewfinder for easy viewing (from approximately 0o - 90o) Do not open beyond 90o. Doing so may cause damage. Note • When attaching and detaching the optional external viewfinder, be sure to do so slowly and carefully. • The optional external viewfinder cannot be used with the external flash. • When a strap is fitted, do not allow it to snag on the optional external viewfinder. • When attaching the optional external viewfinder, do not hold only the optional external viewfinder because it may detach from the camera. • As the eye cup cannot be removed, gently wipe it with a dry and soft cloth, and be careful not to remove it. • If you wipe the eye cup too hard and it is removed, consult the dealer or your nearest Service Centre. • For details, refer to the operating instructions of the optional external viewfinder. VQT2G62 163 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 164 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others Others Using an external flash (optional) After attaching the external flash, the effective range will be increased when compared to the camera’s built in flash. Preparations: • Turn off the camera and close the built-in flash. • Remove the hot shoe cover that is attached to the camera. ∫ Using the dedicated flash (DMW-FL220; optional) Attach the dedicated flash to the hot shoe A and then turn on the camera and the dedicated flash. • Be sure to firmly secure to the dedicated flash with the lock ring B. Select [FLASH] on the [REC] mode menu. (P28) Press 3/4 to select the mode and then press [MENU/SET]. • While the external flash is connected, the following icons are displayed. : External flash Forced ON : External flash Slow sync. Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu. • You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu. ∫ When using other commercially available external flashes without communication functions with the camera (DMC-GF1) • It is necessary to set the exposure on the external flash. If you want to use the external flash in Auto Mode, use an external flash that allows you to set the aperture value and the ISO sensitivity to match the settings on the camera. • Set to Aperture-Priority AE mode or Manual Exposure mode on the camera and then set the same aperture value and ISO sensitivity on the external flash. (The exposure cannot be compensated adequately due to the change on the aperture value in Shutter-Priority AE mode and the external flash cannot control the light adequately in Programme AE mode because the aperture value cannot be fixed.) Note • You can set the aperture value, the shutter speed and the ISO sensitivity on the camera even when attaching the external flash. • Some commercial external flashes have synchro terminals with high-voltage or reversed polarity. Using such extra flashes may cause a malfunction or the camera may not operate normally. 164 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 165 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others • If you use commercially available external flashes with communication functions other than the dedicated one, they may not operate normally or they may be damaged. Do not use them. • Even if the external flash is turned off, the camera may enter the external flash mode when the external flash is attached. When you are not using the external flash, detach it. • When attaching the external flash, the built-in flash cannot be activated. • Do not open the built-in flash when an external flash is attached. • The camera will become unstable when attaching the external flash, it is recommended to use a tripod when taking picture. • Turn off the camera when removing the external flash. • Detach the external flash when carrying the camera. • When attaching the external flash, do not hold only the external flash because it may detach from the camera. • If you use the external flash when the white balance is set to [ ] finely adjust the white balance depending on the picture quality. (P79) • If you take pictures close to the subject in Wide, the vignetting effect may appear on the bottom of the recorded picture. • Read the operating instructions of the external flash for details. Using the Protector/Filter (optional) The MC protector (optional) is a transparent filter which affects neither the colours nor the amount of light, so it can always be used to protect the camera’s lens. The ND filter (optional) reduces the amount of light to approximately 1/8th (equal to adjusting the aperture value 3 increments) without affecting the colour balance. PL filter (optional) will suppress the reflected light from a metal or non spherical surfaces (flat non-metallic surfaces, water vapour or invisible particles in the air), making it possible to take a picture with enhanced contrast. Attach the filter. A MC protector B ND filter C PL filter Note • Do not attach multiple filters at the same time. • If the filter is tightened too much, you may not be able to remove it. Do not tighten it too much. • If the filter is dropped, it may be destroyed. Be careful not to drop it when attaching it to the camera. • Be careful not to get a fingerprint, dirt, etc., on the filter when it is attached, otherwise the focus may be adjusted to the lens, resulting in the subject being out of focus. • You can attach the lens cap or the lens hood when the filter is attached. • Refer to the instructions for each filter for details. • MCu“Multi-coated” VQT2G62 165 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 166 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others NDu“Neutral Density” • It is recommended to use the MC protector (DMW-LMC46; optional), the ND filter (DMW-LND46; optional), or the PL filter (DMW-LPL46; optional) with the 20 mm/F1.7 lens included in DMC-GF1C. • It is recommended to use the MC protector (DMW-LMC52; optional), the ND filter (DMW-LND52; optional), or the PL filter (DMW-LPL52; optional) with the 14-45 mm/F3.5 - 5 .6 lens included in DMC-GF1K. • If you have difficulty attaching or removing the PL filter (DMW-LPL46; optional) on the 20 mm/ F1.7 interchangeable lens included in the DMC-GF1C, we recommend that you attach or remove the filter with the camera power turned on and the Focus Mode set to [MF]. • Accessories other than filters, such as conversion lenses, cannot be mounted. It may cause malfunction. Using the Remote Shutter (optional) If you use the remote shutter (DMW-RSL1; optional), you can avoid jitter (camera shake) when using a tripod and you can keep the shutter pressed fully when taking pictures with [B] (Bulb) or Burst Mode. The remote shutter works similar to the shutter button on the camera. Firmly connect the remote shutter to the [REMOTE] socket on the camera as far as it will go. Take a picture. 1 Press the button lightly to press halfway. 2 Press the button fully to take the picture. (Press it as far as it will go.) 166 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 167 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others ∫ About [LOCK] on the remote shutter • You can keep the shutter button pressed fully. This is effective when taking pictures with Burst Mode (P66) or in [B] (Bulb) (P87). • While pressing the shutter button fully, slide it to the [LOCK] side. • Slide it to the other side to cancel [LOCK]. Note • Do not use any other remote shutters except DMW-RSL1 (optional). • You cannot operate the camera with the remote shutter in the following cases. – When the power save mode is cancelled • Record with Motion Picture P Mode (P104) when using for motion picture recording. Motion picture recording can be started/stopped with the remote shutter. Using the AC Adaptor You can use the camera without worrying about battery discharge when it is connected to a PC or a printer if you use the DC cable (DMW-DCC3; optional) to connect the camera to the battery charger/AC adaptor and connect the AC cable. • Check that the camera is turned off. • Close the flash. Connect the AC cable. Connect the DC cable A. • Pull open the DC cable cover 1 and then connect the DC cable to the camera body using the same steps as “Inserting and Removing the Card (optional)/the Battery” (P24). Pull the DC cable through the opening as shown in the illustration and then close the battery door 2. • Be careful not to catch the DC cable (DMW-DCC3; optional) when closing the battery door. • You cannot charge the battery if you connect the DC cable. Note • Do not use any other AC cables except the supplied one. • Do not use any other cables except a genuine Panasonic DC cable (DMW-DCC3; optional). If you use other DC cables, it may cause a malfunction. • The camera becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction. • Disconnect the charger/AC adaptor and DC cable when the camera is not in use. VQT2G62 167 VQT2G62~Body2_mst.fm 168 ページ 2009年8月24日 月曜日 午後12時9分 Others • It is recommended to use a fully charged battery or AC adaptor when recording motion pictures. • If while recording motion pictures using the AC adaptor the power supply is cut off due to a power cut or if the AC adaptor is disconnected etc., the motion picture being recorded will not be recorded. • The unit is in the standby condition when the AC adaptor is connected. The primary circuit is always “live” as long as the AC adaptor is connected to an electrical outlet. Screen Display/optional external viewfinder • The following images are examples of when the display screen is set to [ monitor style) in the LCD monitor/optional external viewfinder. ∫ In recording Recording in Programme AE mode [ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 168 ] (LCD ] (Initial setting) Flash mode (P60) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Film mode (P82) Optical Image Stabilizer¢1 (P118)/ : STD Jitter alert (P47) : Burst (P66) : Auto Bracket (P68) : Self-timer (P70) 25 REC MODE (P100)/Recording quality (P100) 24 AFS P 1.7 30 −3 0 3 AUTO AWB 9 23 Picture size (P117) 22 Quality (P118) 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 LCD mode¢2 (P33) Intelligent Exposure (P121) Battery indication (P21) Card (P25) (displayed only during recording) Recording state (Flashes red.)/ Focus (P47) (Lights green.) AF area (P47, 71) Dial operation guide (P130)/ Elapsed recording time (P99) Number of recordable pictures¢3 (P187) White balance (P77) ISO sensitivity (P80) Exposure compensation value (P65)/Manual exposure assistance (P86) Shutter speed (P47) Aperture value (P47) Recording mode Metering mode (P120) AF mode (P71) Focus mode (P46) Exposure meter (P127) + VQT2G62 11 12 13 14 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 169 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others ∫ In recording (after settings) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Flash output adjustment (P63) 2nd curtain synchro (P64) Audio recording (P124) Extra Optical Zoom (P49, 122) Histogram (P59) Travel date (P112) AF tracking operation (P43, 72) Available recording time¢3 (P99): R8m30s White Balance Fine Adjustment (P79) White Balance Bracket (P79) My Colour Mode adjustment (P94) Current date and time/“: Travel destination setting¢2, 4 (P114) Custom settings (P96) Programme Shift (P48) AE lock (P75) Face Recognition (P106) AF lock (P75) Age¢2, 5 (P92) Location¢2, 4 (P112) Name¢2, 5 (P92) Number of days that have passed since the departure date¢2, 4 (P112) Self-timer¢6 (P70) Spot metering target (P120) Optional external viewfinder¢7 (P162) Digital zoom (P49, 122) WIND CUT (P103) 26 27 28 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 29 30 A 2nd nd AFL AEL C1 P 31 BKT AWB R12s 32 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 ¢1 Only available when a lens that supports the Stabilizer function is attached ¢2 Only displayed in the LCD monitor. ¢3 It is possible to switch the display between the number of recordable pictures and available recording time with the [REMAINING DISP.] setting in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu. It will display [9999i] when the number of recordable pictures exceeds 10000. ¢4 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on, after setting the clock and after switching from Playback mode to Recording mode. ¢5 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when this unit is turned on in [BABY1]/[BABY2] or [PET] in Scene mode. ¢6 This is displayed during countdown. ¢7 Only available when an optional external viewfinder is installed. VQT2G62 169 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 170 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others ∫ In playback 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Playback mode (P50) Film Mode (P82) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Protected picture (P146) Number of prints (P145) 1 STD REC MODE (P100)/Recording quality 20 1/9 (P100) 19 3s 18 Picture size (P117) 12s 17 Quality (P118) LCD mode (P33) 16 Battery indication (P21) 15 Picture number/Total pictures 0 100 P F1.7 30 Elapsed playback time (P132): 8m30s Motion picture recording time 14 13 (P132): 8m30s Detailed information display Favourites settings (P137) Recording information¢8 14 Age (P92) Name (P92)/Location (P112)/Title (P138) 30 F1.7 Number of days that have passed since the 0 departure date (P112) WB Audio playback (P133) ISO 100 AFS : Motion picture playback (P132) Stamped with text indication (P139) P STANDARD Favourites (P137) 10:00 1.DEC.2009 s Cable disconnection warning icon (P158) RGB 100-0001 Recorded date and time/Travel destination setting (P114) 5,6 7 23 Folder/File number¢8 (P157) ¢9 Histogram display Colour space (P123) Histogram (P59) 10 11 12 21 22 24 ¢8 This is not displayed for motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD Lite]. ¢9 This is not displayed for motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD Lite]/[MOTION JPEG]. 14 F1.7 0 1/9 10 170 VQT2G62 30 ISO100 100-0001 22 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 171 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others Cautions for Use In the event of abnormal operation (e.g. if the unit emits smoke or an unusual smell), immediately stop operating the unit and consult the Panasonic Customer Care Centre on 132600. Optimal use of the camera Take care not to drop or knock the unit or put a lot of pressure on it. • Take care not to knock or drop the bag/case that you inserted the camera in as the shock may cause damage to the camera, lens or LCD monitor. • Do not use a paper bag as it can easily rip causing the camera to fall and be damaged. • We strongly recommend you purchase a good camera bag/case from your local dealer to protect your camera. Keep the camera as far away as possible from electromagnetic equipment (such as microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.). • If you use the camera on top of or near a TV, the pictures and sound on the camera may be disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation. • Do not use the camera near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely affecting the pictures and sound. • Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic fields created by speakers or large motors. • Electromagnetic wave radiation generated by microprocessors may adversely affect the camera, disturbing the pictures and sound. • If the camera is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops functioning properly, turn the camera off and remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor. Then reinsert the battery or reconnect AC adaptor and turn the camera on. Do not use the camera near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines. • If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and sound may be adversely affected. Always use the supplied cords and cables. If you use optional accessories, use the cords and the cables supplied with them. Do not extend the cords or the cables. Do not spray the camera with insecticides or volatile chemicals. • If the camera is sprayed with such chemicals, the body of the camera may be damaged and the surface finish may peel off. • Do not keep rubber or plastic products in contact with the camera for a long period of time. Cleaning Before cleaning the camera, remove the battery or disconnect the power plug from the outlet. Then wipe the camera with a dry soft cloth. • When the camera is soiled badly, it can be cleaned by wiping the dirt off with a wrung wet cloth, and then with a dry cloth. • Wipe off any dirt or dust on the zoom ring and the focus ring with a dry, dustless cloth. • Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, alcohol, kitchen detergents, etc., to clean the camera, since it may deteriorate the external case or the coating may peel off. • When using a chemical cloth, be sure to follow the accompanying instructions. VQT2G62 171 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 172 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others ∫ About dirt on the image sensor This camera features an interchangeable lens system so dirt may get inside the camera body when changing lenses. Depending on the recording conditions, dirt on the image sensor may appear on the recorded picture. Do not change lenses where there is a lot of dust, and always attach the body cap when a lens is not attached to the camera, so that dirt or dust does not get inside the camera body. Remove any dirt on the body cap before attaching it. Dust reduction function This unit has a dust reduction function that will blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the imaging device. This function will function automatically when the camera is turned on, but if you see dust, perform the [SENSOR CLEANING] (P131) in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu. Removing dirt on the image sensor The image sensor is very precise and delicate, so be sure to observe the following when you do have to clean it yourself. • Blow off the dust on the surface of the image sensor with a commercially available blower brush. Be careful not to blow too strongly. • Do not put the blower brush further inside than the lens mount. • Do not let the blower brush touch the image sensor as the image sensor may get scratched. • Do not use any objects except a blower brush to clean the image sensor. • If you cannot remove the dirt or dust with the blower, consult the dealer or your nearest Service Centre. About the LCD monitor/Optional external viewfinder • Do not press the LCD monitor with excessive force. Uneven colours may appear on the LCD monitor and it may malfunction. • If the camera is cold when you turn it on, the picture on the LCD monitor/Optional external viewfinder will be slightly darker than usual at first. However, the picture will return to normal brightness when the internal temperature of the camera increases. Extremely high precision technology is employed to produce the LCD monitor/Optional external viewfinder screen. However there may be some dark or bright spots (red, blue or green) on the screen. This is not a malfunction. The LCD monitor/Optional external viewfinder screen has more than 99.99% effective pixels with a mere 0.01% of the pixels inactive or always lit. The spots will not be recorded on pictures on a card. 172 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 173 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others About the Lens • Do not press the lens with excessive force. • Do not leave the camera with the lens facing the sun as rays of light from the sun may cause it to malfunction. Also, be careful when placing the camera outside or near a window. • When there is dirt (water, oil, and fingerprints, etc.) on the surface of the lens, the picture may be affected. Lightly wipe the surface of the lens with a soft, dry cloth before and after taking pictures. • Do not place the lens mount facing downwards. Do not allow the lens mount contacts 1 to become dirty. Battery The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery. Its ability to generate power comes from the chemical reaction that takes place inside it. This reaction is susceptible to the surrounding temperature and humidity. If the temperature is too high or too low, the operating time of the battery will become shorter. Always remove the battery after use. If you drop the battery accidentally, check to see if the body of the battery and the terminals are damaged. • Inserting a damaged battery in the camera will damage the camera. Bring charged spare batteries when going out. • Be aware that the operating time of the battery becomes shorter in low temperature conditions such as at a ski resort. • When you travel, do not forget to bring the battery charger (supplied) and the AC cable (supplied) so that you can charge the battery in the country that you are travelling in. Dispose of unusable battery. • The battery has a limited life. • Do not throw the battery into fire because it may cause an explosion. Do not allow battery terminals to come into contact with metal objects (such as necklaces, hairpins etc.). • This can cause short circuiting or heat generation and you may be badly burned if you touch a battery. Charger • If you use the battery charger near a radio, the radio reception may be disturbed. • Keep the charger 1 m or more away from radio. • The charger may generate whirring sounds when it is being used. This is not a malfunction. • After use, be sure to disconnect the power supply device from the electrical outlet. (A very small amount of current is consumed if it is left connected.) • Keep the terminals of the charger and battery clean. VQT2G62 173 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 174 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others Card Do not leave the card where the temperature is high, where electromagnetic waves or static electricity are easily generated or exposed to direct sunlight. Do not bend or drop the card. • The card may be damaged or the recorded content may be damaged or deleted. • Put the card in the card case or the storage bag after use and when storing or carrying the card. • Do not allow dirt, dust or water to get into the terminals on the back of the card and do not touch the terminals with your fingers. Notice for when transferring to another party, or disposing of the memory card • “Format” or “delete” using the camera or a PC will only modify the file management information, and it will not erase the data in the memory card completely. It is recommended to physically destroy the memory card or use the commercially available computer data deletion software to completely erase the data in the memory card before transferring to another party or disposing. Management of data in the memory card is the responsibility of the user. About the personal information If a name or birthday is set for [BABY1]/[BABY2]/face recognition function, this personal information is kept in the camera and included in the recorded image. Disclaimer • Information including personal information may be altered or vanish due to erroneous operation, effect of static electricity, accident, malfunction, repair, or other handlings. Please note in advance that Panasonic is not liable in any way for any direct or indirect damage from the alteration or vanishing of information or personal information. When requesting a repair, transferring to another party or disposing • Reset the settings to protect the personal information. (P34) • Remove the memory card from the camera when requesting a repair. • Settings may return to factory default when camera is repaired. • Please contact the dealer where you purchased the camera or your nearest Service Centre if above operations are not possible due to malfunction. When transferring to another party, or disposing of the memory card, please refer to “Notice for when transferring to another party, or disposing of the memory card” on P174. When not using the camera for a long period of time • Store the battery in a cool and dry place with a relatively stable temperature: [Recommended temperature:15 oC to 25 oC, Recommended humidity: 40% to 60%] • Always remove the battery and the card from the camera. • If the battery is left inserted in the camera, it will discharge even if the camera is turned off. If the battery continues to be left in the camera, it will discharge excessively and may become unusable even if charged. • When storing the battery for a long period of time, we recommend charging it once a year. Remove the battery from the camera and store it again after it has completely discharged. • We recommend storing the camera with a desiccant (silica gel) when you keep it in a closet or a cabinet. • Check all the parts before taking pictures when you have not used the camera for a long period of time. 174 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 175 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others About the picture data • Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to inappropriate handling. Panasonic will not be liable for any damage suffered due to loss of recorded data. About tripods or unipods • When you use a tripod, make sure the tripod is stable when this unit is attached to it. • You may not be able to remove the card or the battery when using a tripod or unipod. • Make sure that the screw on the tripod or unipod is not at an angle when attaching or detaching the camera. You may damage the screw on the camera if you use excessive force when turning it. Also, the camera body and the rating label may be damaged or scratched if the camera is attached too tightly to the tripod or unipod. • When a large-diameter lens is attached to the camera, certain tripods/unipods may make contact with the lens. There is a risk that such tripods/unipods will damage the camera or lens so their use should be avoided. • Read the operating instructions for the tripod or unipod carefully. About the shoulder strap • If you attach a heavy interchangeable lens (more than about 1 kg) to the camera body, do not carry the camera by the soulder strap. Hold the camera and the lens when carrying them. Message Display Confirmation messages or error messages will be displayed on the screen/optional external viewfinder in some cases. The major messages are described below as examples. [THIS MEMORY CARD IS LOCKED] > The Write-Protect switch on the SD Memory Card and the SDHC Memory Card are moved to [LOCK]. Move the switch back to unlock it. (P25) [NO VALID PICTURE TO PLAY] > Record a picture or insert a card with a recorded picture and then play it. [THIS PICTURE IS PROTECTED] > Delete the picture after cancelling the protect setting. (P146) [THIS PICTURE CANNOT BE DELETED]/[SOME PICTURES CANNOT BE DELETED] • Pictures not based on the DCF standard cannot be deleted. > If you want to delete some pictures, format the card after saving necessary data on a PC etc. (P36) [NO ADDITIONAL SELECTIONS CAN BE MADE] • The number of pictures, which can be set at one time when [MULTI] has been selected for [DELETE MULTI] (P54), [FAVORITE] (P137), [TITLE EDIT] (P138), [TEXT STAMP] (P139) or [RESIZE] (P141) has been exceeded. > Reduce the number of pictures set, and then repeat the operation. • More than 999 favourites have been set. VQT2G62 175 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 176 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others [CANNOT BE SET ON THIS PICTURE] • [TITLE EDIT], [TEXT STAMP] or [PRINT SET] cannot be set for pictures not based on the DCF standard. [MEMORY CARD ERROR FORMAT THIS CARD?] • This card has a format which is not recognised by the camera. > Format the card again with the camera after saving necessary data on a PC etc. (P36) [PLEASE CHECK THAT THE LENS IS ATTACHED CORRECTLY]/[PLEASE CHECK THE STATUS OF A LENS.] • Do not press the lens release button. • Check that the lens is attached correctly and then turn the camera off and on. > If the message persists, contact the dealer or your nearest Service Centre. • When using a Leica lens mount adaptor (DMW-MA2M or DMW-MA3R; optional), set [SHOOT W/O LENS] (P131) to [ON] in the custom menu. [THE LENS IS NOT ATTACHED PROPERLY.] • Detach the lens and then attach it again. (P16) [MEMORY CARD PARAMETER ERROR]/[THIS MEMORY CARD CANNOT BE USED] > Use a card compatible with this unit. (P25) • You can only use an SDHC Memory Card if using cards with 4 GB or more capacity. [INSERT SD CARD AGAIN]/[TRY ANOTHER CARD] • An error has occurred accessing the card. > Insert the card again. > Insert a different card. [READ ERROR/WRITE ERROR PLEASE CHECK THE CARD] • It has failed to read or write data. > Remove the card after turning the power [OFF]. Insert the card again, turn the power on, and try to read or write the data again. • The card may be broken. > Insert a different card. [CANNOT RECORD DUE TO INCOMPATIBLE FORMAT (NTSC/PAL) DATA ON THIS CARD.] > If you want to delete some pictures, format the card after saving necessary data on a PC etc. (P36) > Insert a different card. [MOTION RECORDING WAS CANCELLED DUE TO THE LIMITATION OF THE WRITING SPEED OF THE CARD] • It is recommended to use a card with SD Speed Class¢ with “Class 6” or higher when recording motion pictures. ¢ SD speed class is the speed standard regarding continuous writing. • When you set the picture quality to [ ], [ ] or [ ], we recommend using a high-speed card with “10MB/s” or greater displayed on the package. • In the event that it stops even after using a “10MB/s” card or higher, the data writing speed has deteriorated so it is recommended to make a backup and then format (P36). • Depending on the type of SD Memory Card or SDHC Memory Card, motion picture recording may stop in the middle. 176 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 177 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others [THIS CARD IS NOT FORMATTED WITH THIS CAMERA, AND NOT SUITABLE FOR MOVIE RECORDING.] • The writing speed is lower if the card has been formatted using a PC or other equipment. As a consequence, motion picture recording may stop in the middle. If this happens, make a backup of the data and format (P36) the card in this unit. [A FOLDER CANNOT BE CREATED] • A folder cannot be created because there are no remaining folder numbers that can be used. (P157) > Format the card after saving necessary data on a PC etc. (P36) If you execute [NO.RESET] in the [SETUP] menu after formatting, the folder number is reset to 100. (P34) [PICTURE IS DISPLAYED FOR 16:9 TV]/[PICTURE IS DISPLAYED FOR 4:3 TV] • The AV cable is connected to the camera. > Press [MENU/SET] if you want to delete this message at once. > Select [TV ASPECT] in the [SETUP] menu if you want to change the TV aspect. (P34) • This message also appears when the USB connection cable is connected to the camera only. In this case, connect the other end of the USB connection cable to a PC or a printer. (P156, 158) [PRINTER BUSY]/[PLEASE CHECK THE PRINTER] • The printer cannot print. > Check the printer. [NO BATTERY POWER REMAINS] • The remaining battery power is low. > Charge the battery. [THIS BATTERY CANNOT BE USED] • The battery cannot be recognised by the camera. > Use a genuine Panasonic battery. If this message is displayed even when a genuine Panasonic battery is used, contact the dealer or your nearest Service Centre. • The battery cannot be recognised as its terminal is dirty. > Remove any dirt etc. from the terminal. VQT2G62 177 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 178 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others Troubleshooting First, try out the following procedures (P178–186). If the problem is not resolved, it may be improved by selecting [RESET] (P34) on the [SETUP] menu. Battery and power source The camera cannot be operated even when it is turned on. • The battery is not inserted correctly. (P24) • The battery is exhausted. • Charge the battery. • AC adaptor is not connected properly. (P167) The LCD monitor turns off while the camera is turned on. • Is the display set to optional external viewfinder (P162)? > Switch to LCD monitor display by pressing [LVF/LCD] on the optional external viewfinder (P162). • Is [AUTO LCD OFF] (P31) of the [ECONOMY] mode active? > Press the shutter button halfway to cancel these modes. • Is the LCD monitor switched off? > Switch the display by pressing [DISPLAY]. (P56) • The battery is exhausted. • Charge the battery. The camera turns off immediately after it is turned on. • The battery is exhausted. • Charge the battery. • If you leave the camera on, the battery will be exhausted. > Turn the camera off frequently by using the [ECONOMY] mode etc. (P31) This unit is turned off automatically. • If you connect to a TV compatible with VIERA Link with a HDMI mini cable (optional) and turn off the power on the TV with the remote control for the TV, the power on this unit also turns off. > If you are not using VIERA Link, set [VIERA Link] to [OFF]. (P35) The [CHARGE] lamp flashes. • Is the temperature of the battery excessively high or low? If it is, it will take longer than usual to charge the battery or charging may remain incomplete. • Are the terminals of the charger or battery dirty? > Wipe off the dirt using a dry cloth. 178 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 179 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others Recording The picture cannot be recorded. • Is the Mode Dial correctly set? • Is the card inserted? • Is there any memory remaining on the card? > Delete the pictures which are not necessary to increase the available memory. (P54) The shutter will not operate immediately when the shutter button is pressed. • Is the subject focused? > [FOCUS PRIORITY] is set to [ON] at the time of purchase, and so you cannot take pictures until the subject is in focus. If you want to be able to take a picture when you press the shutter button fully even if the subject is not focused, set [FOCUS PRIORITY] in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu to [OFF]. (P129) The recorded picture is whitish. • Picture might look whitish when lens or image sensor gets dirty with finger print or similar. > If the lens is dirty turn the camera off and then gently wipe the lens surface with a soft dry cloth. > Refer to P172 when the image sensor gets dirty. The recorded picture is too bright or dark. > Check that the exposure is correctly compensated. (P65) • Is the AE Lock (P75) applied incorrectly? 2 or 3 pictures are taken at one time. > Unset the settings of White Balance Bracket (P79). The subject is not focused properly. • The subject is beyond the focus range of the camera. (P45) • There is camera shake (jitter) or the subject is moving slightly. (P47) • Is [FOCUS PRIORITY] in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu set to [OFF]? (P129) In this case, the picture may not be properly focused even if [AFS] or [AFC] in Focus Mode is set. • Is the AF Lock (P75) applied incorrectly? The recorded picture is blurred. The Optical Image Stabilizer is not effective. • The shutter speed will become slower and the Optical Image Stabilizer function may not work properly when taking pictures especially in dark places. > We recommend holding the camera firmly with both hands when taking pictures. (P37) > We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer (P70) when taking pictures with a slow shutter speed. • Are you using a lens which supports the Stabilizer function? (P17) Taking pictures using White Balance Bracket is not possible. • Is the number of recordable pictures 2 or less? VQT2G62 179 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 180 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others The recorded picture looks rough. Noise appears on the picture. • Is the ISO sensitivity high or the shutter speed slow? (ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] when the camera is shipped. Therefore, when taking pictures indoors etc. noise will appear.) > Decrease the ISO sensitivity. (P80) > Increase the setting for [NOISE REDUCTION] in [FILM MODE] or lower the setting for each of the items other than [NOISE REDUCTION]. (P83) > Take pictures in bright places. > Set the [LONG SHTR NR] to [ON]. (P121) The brightness or the hue of the recorded picture is different from the actual scene. • If recording under fluorescent light, the brightness or the hue may change slightly when the shutter speed becomes fast. This occurs due to the characteristics of fluorescent light. It is not a malfunction. Reddish horizontal streaks appear on the LCD monitor during recording. • This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup sensors. It appears when the subject has a bright part. Some unevenness may occur in the surrounding areas, but this is not a malfunction. It is recorded in motion pictures but is not recorded on still pictures. • It is recommended that you take pictures while taking care not to expose the screen to sunlight or any other source of strong light. Bright spot not in subject is recorded. • This could be an inactive pixel. Perform the [PIXEL REFRESH] (P130) in the [CUSTOM MENU]. You cannot compensate the exposure. • Are you in Exposure Compensation operation? > Press the rear dial to switch to Exposure Compensation operation. (P65) Subject cannot be locked. (AF tracking not possible) • Set the AF area to the distinctive colour of the subject if there is a part that is different from the surrounding colour. (P72) Motion pictures Motion picture recording stops in the middle. • It is recommended to use a card with SD Speed Class¢ with “Class 6” or higher when recording motion pictures. ¢ SD speed class is the speed standard regarding continuous writing. • Depending on the type of the card, recording may stop in the middle. > When you set the picture quality to [ ], [ ] or [ ], we recommend using a high-speed card with “10MB/s” or greater displayed on the package. 180 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 181 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others > If motion picture recording stops during use of a card of at least “10MB/s” or if you use a card that has been formatted on a PC or other equipment, the data-writing speed is lower. In such cases, we recommend that you make a backup of the data and then format (P36) the card in this unit. Object seems to be warped. • Object seems to be warped slightly when the object moves across the image very fast, but this is because the unit is using MOS for the image sensor. This is not a malfunction. Under fluorescent lighting, flicker or horizontal bars may be seen. • This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup sensors. This is not a malfunction. • If there is marked flicker or striping when recording motion pictures in regions with a 60 Hz mains supply, set the Flicker Reduction Function (P104) to [ON]. The Flicker Reduction Function will then activate, automatically adjusting the shutter speed to 1/120. A clicking sound or the sound of the auto focus operation is recorded in motion pictures. • This unit automatically adjusts the aperture during motion picture recording. A clicking sound may occur at this time depending on the lens, and this sound may be recorded on the motion pictures. This is not a malfunction. • With certain lenses, the sound of the Auto Focus Operation is recorded when recording motion pictures. In this case, we recommend setting [CONTINUOUS AF] (P98, 103) to [OFF]. • Operating sounds may be recorded when the zoom or buttons are operated etc. while recording motion pictures. Also, the operating sound of the dial may be recorded when the rear dial is operated. Lens Recorded image may be warped, or nonexistent colour is surrounding the subject. • Depending on the lens used, picture may be warped slightly or you may see colours along the edge depending on the zoom factor, due to the characteristics of the lens. Also, the peripherals of the image might look warped because the perspective is enhanced when the wide angle is used. This is not a malfunction. Flash The flash is not activated. • Is the flash closed? > Press the [ OPEN] button to open the flash. (P60) The flash is activated 2 times. • The flash is activated 2 times. The interval between the first and second flash is longer when Red-eye Reduction (P61) is set so the subject should not move until the second flash is activated. VQT2G62 181 VQT2G62~Body2_mst.fm 182 ページ 2009年8月25日 火曜日 午後5時19分 Others LCD monitor/optional external viewfinder The LCD monitor turns off although the camera is turned on. • The LCD monitor turns off when [AUTO LCD OFF] (P31) is selected for the [ECONOMY] mode. [This does not happen when using the AC adaptor (P167).] If the remaining battery power is low, it may take longer for the flash to be charged, and the time during which the LCD monitor is turned off may become longer. The LCD monitor/optional external viewfinder is too bright or dark. > Adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor/Optional External Viewfinder to a proper level. (P33) • [POWER LCD] is activated. (P33) The LCD monitor/optional external viewfinder is disrupted momentarily while recording. • This occurs due to the aperture of the lens changing when the shutter button is pressed half-way, or when the brightness of the subject changes. This is not a malfunction. • This may occur more often when a bright lens, such as the 20 mm/F1.7 interchangeable lens included with the DMC-GF1C, is used for recording in brightly lit outdoor environments. The picture is not displayed on the LCD monitor. • Is the LCD monitor switched off? > Switch the display by pressing [DISPLAY]. (P56) • Does the picture appear on the Optional External Viewfinder? > Switch to LCD monitor display by pressing [LVF/LCD] on the Optional External Viewfinder (P162). The picture does not switch between LCD monitor and optional external viewfinder when [LVF/LCD] is pressed on the optional external viewfinder (P162). • It is only displayed on the LCD monitor when the camera is connected to a PC or printer. Black, red, blue and green dots appear on the LCD monitor. • This is not a malfunction. These pixels do not affect the recorded pictures. Noise appears on the LCD monitor. • In dark places, noise may appear to maintain the brightness of the LCD monitor. You see red, green, or blue flashes when you move your eyes in the optional external viewfinder (P162), or when the camera is moved rapidly. • This is a characteristic of the drive system of the Optional External Viewfinder (P162) of this unit, and it is not a malfunction. There will be no problem with the recorded image. Playback The picture being played back is not rotated, or is rotated in an unexpected direction, when displayed. • You can display the pictures without being rotated when [ROTATE DISP.] (P144) is set to [OFF]. • You can rotate pictures with the [ROTATE] function. (P144) • You can only display the pictures rotated if you use a lens (P14) that supports the Direction Detection Function (P37) and [ROTATE DISP.] is set to [ON]. 182 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 183 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others The picture is not played back. • Did you press [(]? • Is the card inserted? • Is there a picture on the card? • Is this a picture whose file name has been changed in the PC? If it is, it cannot be played back by this unit. The recorded pictures are not displayed. • Has [PLAYBACK MODE] been set for playback? > Change to [NORMAL PLAY]. (P136) The folder number and the file number are displayed as [—] and the screen turns black. • Is this a non-standard picture, a picture which has been edited using a PC or a picture which was taken by another make of digital camera? • Did you remove the battery immediately after picture-taking or did you take the picture using a battery with a low remaining charge? > Format the data to delete the pictures mentioned above. (P36) (Other pictures will be deleted as well and it will not be possible to restore them. Therefore, check well before formatting.) Images with different date as recorded date are played back in the Calendar Playback. • Is the clock in the camera set properly? (P26) • Images edited on a PC or images recorded on other cameras might display a different date to the recorded date during the Calendar Playback. White round spots like soap bubbles appear on the recorded picture. • If you take a picture with the flash in a dark place or indoors, white round spots may appear on the picture caused by the flash reflecting of particles of dust in the air. This is not a malfunction. A characteristic of this is that the number of round spots and their position differ in every picture. [THUMBNAIL IS DISPLAYED] appears on the screen. • Is it a picture that has been recorded with other equipment? In such cases, these pictures may be displayed with a deteriorated picture quality. Red part of the recorded image has changed colour to black. • When Digital Red-Eye Reduction ([ ], [ ], [ ]) is in operation, if you take a picture of subject with red colour surrounded by a skin tone colour, that red part may be corrected to black by the Digital Red-Eye Reduction Function. > It is recommend to take picture with Flash Mode set to [‡], [‰] or [Œ], or [RED-EYE REMOVAL] on the [REC] Mode menu set to [OFF]. (P119) VQT2G62 183 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 184 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others TV, PC and printer The picture does not appear on the television. • Is the camera connected to the TV correctly? > Set the TV input to external input mode. • Output from the [HDMI] socket is not possible when it is connected to the PC or the printer. > Connect it only to the TV. The display areas on the TV screen and the camera’s LCD monitor are different. • Depending on the TV model, the pictures may be extended horizontally or vertically or they may be displayed with their edges cut off. The motion pictures cannot be played back on a TV. • Are you trying to play back the motion pictures by directly inserting the card in the card slot of the TV? > Connect the camera to the TV with the AV cable (supplied), or with the HDMI mini cable (optional), and then play back the motion pictures on the camera. (P149, 150) > Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD Lite] can be played back on Panasonic televisions (VIERA) with the AVCHD logo. The picture is not displayed fully on the TV. > Check [TV ASPECT] setting. (P34) VIERA Link does not work. • Is it connected properly with the HDMI mini cable (optional)? (P150) > Confirm that the HDMI mini-cable (optional) is firmly fitted. > Press [(] on this unit. • Is the [VIERA Link] on this unit set to [ON]? (P35) > Depending on HDMI terminal of the TV, the input channel may not switch automatically. In this case, use the remote control for the TV to switch input. (For details on how to switch input, please read the operating instructions for the TV.) > Check the VIERA Link setting on the connected device. > Turn the power to the unit off and then back on again. > Set [VIERA Link] to [Off] on the TV and then turn it back to [On]. (Refer to the operating instructions of the TV for details.) > Check [VIDEO OUT] setting. (P34) The picture cannot be transferred when the camera is connected to a PC. • Is the camera connected to the PC correctly? • Is the camera recognised by the PC correctly? > Set to [PC] in [USB MODE]. (P34, 156) The card is not recognised by the PC. > Disconnect the USB connection cable. Connect it again while the card is inserted in the camera. The picture cannot be printed when the camera is connected to a printer. • Pictures cannot be printed using a printer which does not support PictBridge. > Set to [PictBridge(PTP)] in [USB MODE]. (P34, 158) 184 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 185 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others The ends of the pictures are cut at printing. > When using a printer with a trimming or borderless printing function, cancel this function before printing. (For details, refer to the operating instructions for the printer.) > When you order photo studios to print pictures, ask the photo studio if the pictures can be printed with both ends. Others There is a sound from lens unit. • It is a sound of lens movement or aperture operation when the power is turned [ON] or [OFF], and it is not a malfunction. • You may hear a sound from the lens and image in the LCD monitor may suddenly change when the brightness has changed by zoom operation or moving the camera, but there is no effect on recording. The sound is caused by the automatic adjustment of the aperture. This is not a malfunction. An unreadable language was selected by mistake. > Press [MENU/SET], select the [SETUP] menu icon [ the desired language. (P36) ] and then select the [~] icon to set Part of the picture is flashing in black and white. • This is a highlight function showing the white saturated area. (P32) • Is the [HIGHLIGHT] set to [ON]? A red lamp sometimes turns on when the shutter button is pressed halfway. • In dark places, the AF assist lamp (P129) lights red to make it easier to focus on a subject. The AF assist lamp does not turn on. • Is [AF ASSIST LAMP] on the [CUSTOM MENU] menu set to [ON]? (P129) • The AF assist lamp does not turn on in bright places. The camera becomes warm. • The surface of the camera may become warm during use. This does not affect the performance or quality of the camera. The clock is reset. • If you do not use the camera for a long time, the clock may be reset. > When the message [PLEASE SET THE CLOCK] appears, set the clock again. When you take a picture before setting the clock, [0:00 0. 0. 0] is recorded. (P26) The file numbers are not recorded consecutively. • When you perform an operation after taking a certain action, the pictures may be recorded in folders with different numbers from the ones used prior to the operation. (P157) VQT2G62 185 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 186 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others The file numbers are recorded in ascending order. • If the battery was inserted or removed without first turning the camera’s power off, the folder and file numbers for the pictures taken will not be stored in the memory. When the power is then turned back on and pictures are taken, they may be stored under file numbers which should have been assigned to previous pictures. Age is not displayed correctly. • Check the clock (P26) and birthday settings (P93). 186 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 187 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others Others Number of Recordable Pictures and Available Recording Time • The number of recordable pictures and the available recording time are an approximation. (These vary depending on the recording conditions and the type of card.) • The number of recordable pictures and the available recording time varies depending on the subjects. ∫ Number of recordable pictures Aspect ratio X : 4000k3000 pixels (12 million pixels) Picture size Quality Card 32 MB 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB 512 MB 1 GB 2 GB 4 GB 6 GB 8 GB 12 GB 16 GB 32 GB : 2816k2112 pixels (5.9 million pixels) A › 3 7 0 1 A 6 › 14 1 1 7 16 2 3 15 31 3 3 17 35 5 6 32 64 6 7 34 71 11 13 63 125 13 14 70 140 22 26 125 250 26 29 140 280 45 54 250 510 52 59 290 570 92 110 520 1020 105 120 570 1130 180 210 1030 2010 210 230 870 1720 270 320 1560 3050 320 350 1160 2310 370 440 2090 4090 430 480 1760 3490 550 660 3160 6170 650 720 2350 4660 740 880 4220 8230 860 960 4710 9350 1490 1770 8470 16520 1740 1930 VQT2G62 187 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 188 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others Aspect ratio X Picture size Quality Card 32 MB 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB 512 MB 1 GB 2 GB 4 GB 6 GB 8 GB 12 GB 16 GB 32 GB Y : 2048k1536 pixels (3.1 million pixels) : 4000k2672 pixels (10.7 million pixels) A › 17 35 1 1 A 3 8 1 1 37 74 3 3 8 18 2 3 77 150 7 8 18 39 6 7 150 290 15 15 38 77 12 14 300 590 30 31 77 155 24 29 600 1180 60 63 155 310 50 60 1220 2360 120 125 310 620 100 120 2410 4640 240 250 620 1230 200 240 3660 7050 360 380 940 1870 300 360 4910 9440 490 510 1270 2500 410 490 7400 14240 730 770 1910 3770 620 740 9880 19000 980 1030 2550 5040 830 980 19820 38120 1970 2070 5130 10110 1660 1980 Aspect ratio Y : 2816k1880 pixels (5.3 million pixels) Picture size Quality Card 188 32 MB 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB 512 MB 1 GB 2 GB 4 GB 6 GB 8 GB 12 GB 16 GB 32 GB VQT2G62 › : 2048k1360 pixels (2.8 million pixels) A › 7 15 1 1 A 20 › 39 1 2 16 33 3 3 42 82 4 4 34 69 7 8 87 165 8 9 68 135 14 16 170 330 16 17 135 270 29 32 340 650 33 35 270 540 58 65 680 1310 67 71 550 1070 115 130 1360 2560 135 140 1090 2110 230 260 2680 5020 260 280 1660 3210 350 390 4070 7640 410 430 2230 4300 470 530 5450 10230 540 570 3360 6490 720 800 8230 15430 820 860 4490 8660 960 1070 10980 20590 1100 1150 9010 17390 1930 2150 22020 41300 2210 2320 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 189 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others Aspect ratio W : 4000k2248 pixels (9.0 million pixels) Picture size Quality Card 32 MB 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB 512 MB 1 GB 2 GB 4 GB 6 GB 8 GB 12 GB 16 GB 32 GB A › 4 9 1 1 12 25 2 2 9 20 3 4 26 53 4 4 21 43 7 8 54 105 9 10 43 86 14 17 105 210 18 20 Card › 86 170 29 35 210 420 36 40 340 58 70 430 850 73 80 350 700 115 140 870 1700 145 160 700 1380 230 280 1720 3350 290 320 1060 2100 350 430 2620 5090 440 480 1420 2820 480 570 3500 6820 600 650 2150 4250 720 860 5290 10290 900 980 2870 5670 960 1150 7050 13720 1200 1310 5760 11390 1930 2320 14160 27530 2420 2640 W : 1920k1080 pixels (2.1 million pixels) Picture size 32 MB 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB 512 MB 1 GB 2 GB 4 GB 6 GB 8 GB 12 GB 16 GB 32 GB A 175 Aspect ratio Quality : 2816k1584 pixels (4.5 million pixels) : 2992k2992 pixels (9.0 million pixels) A › 26 52 2 2 A 4 › 10 1 1 56 105 5 5 10 23 3 4 115 220 10 10 23 48 7 8 220 430 20 21 47 95 14 17 440 860 40 42 95 185 29 34 900 1720 81 84 190 380 59 70 1800 3410 160 170 390 760 120 140 3540 6700 320 330 760 1500 230 270 5390 10190 490 510 1160 2290 350 420 7220 13640 650 680 1560 3060 480 560 10890 20580 990 1030 2350 4620 720 850 14530 27450 1320 1380 3140 6170 970 1140 29150 55070 2650 2770 6310 12390 1940 2290 VQT2G62 189 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 190 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others Aspect ratio : 2112k2112 pixels (4.5 million pixels) Picture size Quality Card 32 MB 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB 512 MB 1 GB 2 GB 4 GB 6 GB 8 GB 12 GB 16 GB 32 GB Aspect ratio Quality Card 190 32 MB 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB 512 MB 1 GB 2 GB 4 GB 6 GB 8 GB 12 GB 16 GB 32 GB VQT2G62 : 1504k1504 pixels (2.3 million pixels) A › 12 25 1 2 A 24 › 48 2 2 26 53 4 4 52 100 4 5 54 105 8 9 105 200 9 10 105 210 17 19 210 390 19 20 210 420 35 38 410 790 38 40 430 850 71 78 830 1580 77 81 870 1700 145 155 1660 3070 155 165 1720 3350 280 310 3260 6030 310 320 2620 5090 430 470 4950 9170 470 490 3500 6820 580 630 6630 12280 630 660 5290 10290 870 950 10010 18520 950 990 7050 13720 1170 1270 13350 24700 1270 1320 14160 27530 2340 2550 26790 49560 2540 2660 X Y W 2 2 2 4 4 5 5 8 9 11 11 16 18 22 21 33 37 44 42 67 75 89 86 135 150 180 170 260 300 350 340 400 450 540 520 540 610 720 690 820 920 1090 1050 1090 1220 1450 1400 2190 2460 2920 2810 2 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 191 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others ∫ Available recording time (when recording motion pictures) File format [AVCHD Lite] [MOTION JPEG] Recording quality setting 32 MB 4s 64 MB 128 MB Cannot be guaranteed in operation. 256 MB Card 16 s 17 s 55 s 12 s 37 s 38 s 1 min 57 s 29 s 1 min 18 s 1 min 21 s 4 min 00 s 59 s 2 min 35 s 2 min 40 s 7 min 50 s 512 MB 3 min 45 s 4 min 50 s 7 min 10 s 2 min 00 s 5 min 10 s 5 min 20 s 15 min 40 s 1 GB 7 min 20 s 9 min 30 s 14 min 00 s 4 min 00 s 10 min 20 s 10 min 50 s 31 min 20 s 2 GB 15 min 20 s 20 min 00 s 29 min 00 s 8 min 20 s 21 min 20 s 22 min 10 s 1h 04 min 4 GB 30 min 30 s 40 min 00 s 1h 00 min 16 min 30 s 41 min 50 s 43 min 40 s 2h 05 min 6 GB 46 min 40 s 1h 01 min 1h 28 min 25 min 10 s 1h 03 min 1h 06 min 3h 11 min 8 GB 1h 02 min 1h 22 min 1h 58 min 33 min 40 s 1h 25 min 1h 28 min 4h 15 min 12 GB 1h 34 min 2h 04 min 2h 59 min 50 min 50 s 2h 08 min 2h 14 min 6h 26 min 16 GB 2h 06 min 2h 45 min 4h 00 min 1h 08 min 2h 52 min 2h 59 min 8h 35 min 32 GB 4h 14 min 5h 32 min 8h 00 min 2h 16 min 5h 45 min 5h 59 min 17 h 13 min • Motion picture recorded continuously in [MOTION JPEG] is up to 2 GB. Only the maximum recordable time for 2 GB is displayed on the screen. [AVCHD Lite] can be recorded to the capacity of the card.¢ ¢ The recording may stop even if there is more space left in the card depending on the life of the battery. (P22) Note • The number of recordable pictures and the available recording time displayed on the screen may not decrease in order. • If you set [EX. OPT. ZOOM] (P122) to [ON], [ ] is displayed on the screen when the picture size is set to a size other than the maximum picture size for each aspect ratio. VQT2G62 191 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 192 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others Specifications Digital Camera Body (DMC-GF1): Information for your safety Power Source: DC 9.3 V Power Consumption: 2.4 W (When recording with LCD Monitor) [When 20 mm/F1.7 lens included in DMC-GF1C is used] 2.7 W (When recording with LCD Monitor) [When 14 – 45 mm/F3.5 – 5.6 lens included in DMC-GF1K is used] 1.5 W (When playing back with LCD Monitor) [When 20 mm/F1.7 lens included in DMC-GF1C is used] 1.8 W (When playing back with LCD Monitor) [When 14 – 45 mm/F3.5 – 5.6 lens included in DMC-GF1K is used] Camera effective pixels: 12,100,000 pixels Image sensor: 4/3q Live MOS sensor, total pixel number 13,060,000 pixels, Primary colour filter Digital zoom: Max. 4k Extra Optical Zoom: ON/OFF simple enlargement (compatible with lenses from (Except for the maximum other manufacturers) picture size for each aspect ratio) Focus: Auto focus/Manual Focus, Face detection/AF Tracking/ 23-area-focusing/1-area-focusing Shutter system: Focal-plane shutter Burst recording Burst speed: 3 pictures/second (High speed), 2 pictures/second (Low speed) Number of recordable pictures: Max. 7 pictures (when there are RAW files) Depends on the capacity of the card (when there are no RAW files) ISO sensitivity (Standard AUTO/ /100/200/400/800/1600/3200 Output Sensitivity): Shutter speed: B (Bulb) (max. 4 minutes), 60 seconds to 1/4000th of a second Metering range: EV 0 to EV 18 White balance: Auto white balance/Daylight/Cloudy/Shade/Incandescent lights/ Flash/White set1/White set2/White balance K set Exposure (AE): Programme AE (P)/Aperture-priority AE (A)/Shutter-priority AE (S)/Manual exposure (M)/AUTO Exposure Compensation (1/3 EV Step, j3 EV to i3 EV) Metering mode: Multiple/Centre weighted/Spot LCD monitor: 3.0q TFT LCD (Approx. 460,000 dots) (field of view ratio about 100%) 192 VQT2G62 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 193 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others Flash: Flash synchronization speed: Microphone: Speaker: Recording media: Picture size Still picture: Recording quality Motion pictures: Quality: Recording file format Still Picture: Pictures with audio: Built-in pop up flash GN 6 equivalent (ISO100 · m) Flash range: Approx. 40 cm to 7.0 m (When the 20 mm/F1.7 lens included in DMC-GF1C is mounted, [ISO AUTO] is set) Flash range: Approx. 1.0 m to 3.4 m (When the 14 – 45 mm/F3.5– 5.6 lens included in DMC-GF1K is mounted, WIDE, [ISO AUTO] is set) AUTO, AUTO/Red-eye reduction, Forced ON, Forced ON/ Red-eye reduction, Slow sync., Slow sync./Red-eye reduction, Forced OFF Equal to or smaller than 1/160th of a second Monaural Monaural SD Memory Card/SDHC Memory Card When the aspect ratio setting is [X] 4000k3000 pixels, 2816k2112 pixels, 2048k1536 pixels When the aspect ratio setting is [Y] 4000k2672 pixels, 2816k1880 pixels, 2048k1360 pixels When the aspect ratio setting is [W] 4000k2248 pixels, 2816k1584 pixels, 1920k1080 pixels When the aspect ratio setting is [ ] 2992k2992 pixels, 2112k2112 pixels, 1504k1504 pixels [AVCHD Lite] (With audio) When set to [SH]: 1280k720 pixels (50p recording¢/17 Mbps)/ When set to [H]: 1280k720 pixels (50p recording¢/13 Mbps)/ When set to [L]: 1280k720 pixels (50p recording¢/9 Mbps) (¢Sensor output is 25 frames/sec.) [MOTION JPEG] (With audio) When set to [HD]: 1280k720 pixels (30 frames/sec.)/ When set to [WVGA]: 848k480 pixels (30 frames/sec.)/ When set to [VGA]: 640k480 pixels (30 frames/sec.)/ When set to [QVGA]: 320k240 pixels (30 frames/sec.) RAW/RAWiFine/RAWiStandard/Fine/Standard JPEG (based on “Design rule for Camera File system”, based on “Exif 2.21” standard)/DPOF corresponding JPEG (based on “Design rule for Camera File system”, based on “Exif 2.21” standard)r“QuickTime” (pictures with audio) Motion pictures with audio: AVCHD Lite/QuickTime Motion JPEG Interface Digital: “USB 2.0” (High Speed) VQT2G62 193 DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 194 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others Analogue video/ audio: NTSC/PAL Composite (Switched by menu) Audio line output (monaural) Terminal [REMOTE]: φ 2.5 mm jack [AV OUT/DIGITAL]: Dedicated jack (8 pin) [HDMI]: MiniHDMI TypeC (1.3a corresponding) [DC IN]: None (when using an AC adaptor, use optional DC cable) [External viewfinder]: Dedicated connector [External microphone]: None Dimensions: Approx. 119 mm (W)k71 mm (H)k36.3 mm (D) (excluding the projecting parts) Mass: Approx. 285 g (camera body), Approx. 442 g, (with the 20 mm/F1.7 lens included in DMC-GF1C, card and battery) Approx. 537 g, (with the 14 – 45 mm/F3.5 – 5.6 lens included in DMC-GF1K, card and battery) Operating temperature: 0 oC to 40 oC Operating humidity: 10% to 80% AC Adaptor (Panasonic DE-A49C): Information for your safety Input: 110 V to 240 V Output: DIGITAL CAMERA 9.3 V CHARGE 8.4 V 0.65 A 50/60 Hz, 0.3 A Battery Pack (lithium-ion) (Panasonic DMW-BLB13E): Information for your safety Voltage/capacity : 194 VQT2G62 7.2 V/1250 mAh 1.2 A DMC-GF1GN-VQT2G62_eng.book 195 ページ 2009年8月20日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Others Interchangeable Lens (H-H020) “LUMIX G 20 mm/F1.7 ASPH.” Focal length: f=20 mm (35 mm film camera equivalent: 40 mm) Aperture type: 7 leaf shutters/iris diaphragm/circular diaphragm Aperture range: F1.7 Minimum aperture value: Lens construction: In focus distance: F16 7 elements in 5 groups (2 non-spherical lenses) 20 cm to ¶ (from the focus distance reference line) Maximum image magnification: 0.13k (35 mm film camera equivalent: 0.25k) Stabilizer: Mount: Angle of view: Filter diameter: None “Micro Four Thirds Mount” 57x 46 mm Max. diameter: Approx. 63 mm Overall length: Approx. 25.5 mm (from the tip of the lens to the base side of the lens mount) Approx. 100 g Mass: Interchangeable Lens (H-FS014045) “LUMIX G VARIO 14– 45 mm/F3.5 – 5.6 ASPH./MEGA O.I.S.” Focal length: f=14 mm to 45 mm (35 mm film camera equivalent: 28 mm to 90 mm) Aperture type: 7 leaf shutters/iris diaphragm/circular diaphragm Aperture range: F3.5 (Wide) to F5.6 (Tele) Minimum aperture value: F22 Lens construction: 12 elements in 9 groups (1 non-spherical lenses) In focus distance: 30 cm to ¶ (from the focus distance reference line) Maximum image magnification: 0.17k (35 mm film camera equivalent: 0.34k) Optical Image Stabilizer: Available Mount: “Micro Four Thirds Mount” Angle of view: 75x (Wide) to 27x (Tele) Filter diameter: 52 mm Max. diameter: Approx. 60 mm Overall length: Approx. 60 mm (from the tip of the lens to the base side of the lens mount) Approx. 195 g Mass: VQT2G62 195 VQT2G62~BCover_eng.fm 196 ページ 2009年8月24日 月曜日 午後12時12分 • G MICRO SYSTEM is a lens exchange type digital camera system of LUMIX based on a Micro Four Thirds System standard. • Micro Four Thirds™ and Micro Four Thirds Logo marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Olympus Imaging Corporation, in Japan, the United States, the European Union and other countries. • Four Thirds™ and Four Thirds Logo marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Olympus Imaging Corporation, in Japan, the United States, the European Union and other countries. • SDHC Logo is a trademark. • The “AVCHD”, “AVCHD Lite” and the “AVCHD”, “AVCHD Lite” logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation. • Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. • HDMI, the HDMI Logo and the High-Definition Multimedia Interface are the registered trademarks or trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. • HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation. • QuickTime and the QuickTime logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc., used under license therefrom. • Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. • Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation. • Other names, company names, and product names printed in these instructions are trademarks or registered trademarks of the companies concerned. This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license for the personal and non-commercial use of a consumer to (i) encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com. A VQT2G62 F0809KD0 ( 500 ) Panasonic Corporation Web Site: http://panasonic.net Panasonic Corporation 2009
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39 GTS PDFX Conformance : PDF/X-1a:2001 GTS PDFX Version : PDF/X-1:2001 Trapped : False Producer : Acrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Windows) Modify Date : 2009:09:01 08:45:47+09:00 Create Date : 2009:08:20 11:09:05+09:00 Metadata Date : 2009:09:01 08:45:47+09:00 Format : application/pdf Title : untitled Document ID : uuid:4053c6c7-7740-4b9f-ac31-c939a27b7d19 Instance ID : uuid:dad3d27c-d6e1-4b83-855e-36791a522ded Page Count : 196EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools